Home

SIMATIC HMI HMI Device TP 177A, TP 177B, OP

1. Type Data channel TP 177A TP 177B 6 TP 177B 4 OP 177B Backup Serial Yes Yes Yes MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Yes USB 3 Yes Yes PROFINET 4 Yes Yes Serial Yes Yes Yes Restoring Serial with reset to factory setting Yes 1 No 2 No No Serial Yes Yes Yes MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Yes USB 3 Yes Yes PROFINET 4 Yes Yes Updating the Serial with reset to factory setting Yes Yes No operating system Serial Yes Yes Yes MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Yes USB 3 Yes Yes PROFINET 4 Yes Yes PROFINET 4 with restore to No Yes factory setting Transferring a Serial Yes Yes Yes project MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Yes USB 3 Yes Yes PROFINET 4 Yes Yes Install or remove Serial Yes Yes option MPI PROFIBUS DP B Yes Yes USB 3 Yes Yes PROFINET 4 Yes Yes Transferring license Serial Yes Yes keys and uploading MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes license keys 3 USB 3 Yes Yes PROFINET 4 Yes Yes 1 Applies to complete restoring 2 Applies to restoring the password list 3 Applies to TP 177B 6 DP TP 177B 4 PN DP TP 177B 6 PN DP OP 177B DP and OP 177B PN DP when using a USB master master cable You will find more information about transferring via USB on the Internet at http support automation siemens com WW view en 19142034 4 Applies to TP 177B 4 PN DP TP 177B 6 PN DP and OP 177B PN DP TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operati
2. Icon Function Tab entry vA Configuring the LAN connection LAN9115 Setting the IP address LAN9115 Settings IP Address Set name server LAN9115 Settings Name Servers Changing Ethernet settings LAN9115 Settings Ethernet Parameters a 4 Changing the logon data Network ID E ip Backup registry information Persistent Storage Changing monitor settings Display Displaying information about the HMI device Device Restarting the HMI device Device Calibrating the touch screen Touch Activate memory management Memory Monitoring Changing password protection Password Settings S Changing the printer properties gezan Changing the PROFINET IO setting Sd Changing regional settings Regional Settings Changing the number format Number Changing the currency format Currency Changing the time format Time Changing the date format Date am Changing transfer settings MPI ni Changing the PROFIBUS DP transfer settings PROFIBUS S7 Ethernet settings S7 Ethernet Setting the screen saver Reducing the backlit display Displaying system properties General Displaying memory information Memory Setting the device name of the HMI device Device Name ca Configuring the data channel Channel UB Setting the delay time Directories a Setting the uninterruptible power supply Configuration State of uninterruptible power supply Current
3. 150000 No more data is read or written Possible causes Ensure that the cable is plugged in the controller is e The cable is defective operational the correct interface is being used e The PLC does not respond is defective etc Restart the system if the system alarm persists e The wrong port is used for the connection e System overload 150001 Connection is up because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated 160000 No more data is read or written Possible causes Ensure that the cable is plugged in the controller is e The cable is defective operational the correct interface is being used e The PLC does not respond is defective etc Restart the system if the system alarm persists e The wrong port is used for the connection e System overload 160001 Connection is up because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated 160010 No connection to the server because the server Check access rights identification CLS ID cannot be determined Values cannot be read or written 160011 No connection to the server because the server Check for example if identification CLS ID cannot be determined e the server name is correct Values cannot be read or written e the computer name is correct e the server is registered 160012 No connection to the server because the server Check for example if identification CLS ID cannot be determined e the server name is correct Values ca
4. Number Effect cause Remedy 40011 The system function could not be executed since Check the parameter types in the configuration the parameters could not be converted to a common tag type 50000 The HMI device is receiving data faster than it is capable of processing Therefore no further data is accepted until all current data have been processed Data exchange then resumes 50001 Data exchange has been resumed 60000 This alarm is generated by the DisplaySystemAlarms function The text to be displayed is transferred to the function as a parameter 60010 The file could not be copied in the direction defined Restart the system function or check the paths of the because one of the two files is currently open or the source target files Using Windows NT 2000 XP source target path is not available The user executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be It is possible that the Windows user has no access granted access rights for the files rights to one of the two files 60011 An attempt was made to copy a file to itself Check the path of the source target file It is possible that the Windows user has no access Using Windows NT 2000 XP with NTFS rights to one of the two files The user executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted access rights for the files 70010 The application could not be started because it Check if the application exists in the specified path or could not be found in th
5. Alphanumerical 233 Change layout 146 Character repeat Configure For Control Panel Language change 254 Numerical 231 252 Representation types Setting the character repeat 103 Symbolic 235 Screen keyboard Outside an open project Screen saver 143 159 Setting 92 124 158 Screen settings Changing Screen settings 3 Changin 84 1111 Screens SecureMode 140 disabling 140 378 Security 237 269 Security system 237 Selection list 2 Service On the Internet 7 Service pack 323 Set up Network Password protection 152 SecureMode 140 Setting Backlighting 11 Date 108 Delay time Device name 143 Double click 148 E Mail E mail connection IP address i Name server Network Number format 155 PC PPI adapter 63 Power supply Printer connection Printer properties PROFIBUS 176 PROFIBUS DP 14 PROFINET IO Regional data 15 Screen saver 158 Storage location 168 Time Time format UPS Setting the date Setting the delay time Setting the double click Setting the time Setting the time zone Settings Internet regional specific S7 Transfer 143 Shipping conditions 38 Side view 16 h7 19 20 Siemens HMI input panel options SIMATIC controller TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Index Protocol Protocols Simple recipe view 297 Simple
6. The Loader buttons have the following functions e Press the Transfer button to set the HMI device to Transfer mode The transfer mode can only be activated when at least one data channel has been enabled for the transfer e Press the Start button to start the project on the HMI device If you do not perform an operation the project on the HMI device will automatically start after a delay e Press the Control Panel button to open the HMI device Control Panel You can change various settings in the Control Panel for example the transfer settings e Press the Taskbar button to activate the taskbar with the Windows CE start menu open r My TaskBar Computer z Recycle Bin da secure mode TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 138 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Open Loader The following options are available to open the Loader e The Loader appears briefly after starting the HMI device e The Loader appears when the project is closed If configured use the relevant operating element to close the project For further information on this refer to your plant documentation Protection against unauthorized access You can use a password to protect the Control Panel and taskbar from unauthorized access In addition you can protect the taskbar and the desktop with the aid of t
7. 08 01 2004 16 20 15 156 Engine 23 too hot The layout and operation of the Alarm window correspond to that of the Alarm view The Alarm window is independent of the process screen Depending on the configuration the Alarm window appears automatically as soon as a new unacknowledged alarm has been received The Alarm window can be configured so that it only closes after all the alarms have been acknowledged Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Alarms Operating elements Functions of the Alarm view buttons 9 1 Operating Alarms TP 177A Button Function Displays infotext for an alarm Edit alarm Acknowledging an alarm wE E window Shows the full text of the selected alarm in a separate window the alarm text In the alarm text window you can view alarm texts that require more space than is available in the alarm view Close the alarm text window with K Select the next or previous alarm in the list ain Scroll one page up or down Alarm class layout The various alarm classes are identified to distinguish them in the Alarm view Icon Alarm class Error empty Operation depends on the configuration User defined alarm classes System The configuration engineer can edit th
8. Button for reducing the contrast 2 Proceed as follows to change contrast of the screen Touch the UP button to increase the contrast of the screen Touch the DOWN button to decrease the contrast of the screen 3 Close the dialog and save your entries with ok Touch x to discard the entries Result The HMI device screen contrast has now been changed Note You can also adjust the contrast within an open project Refer to the corresponding system documentation for more information in this regard TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 111 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 10 Displaying Information about the HMI Device Requirement The OP Properties dialog has been opened with the OP ie icon Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Open the OP Properties dialog then select the Device tab OP Properties Persistent Storage Display Device Device OP 1776 color DP Image y01 00 00 00_03 48 oO Bootloader 1 00 Bootloader Rel Date 12 5 2005 e o O Flashsize 16 MB MAC Address 08 00 06 2b ad be i Reboot 3 HMI device name Q9 Version of the HMI device image Version of the boot loader Boot loader release date Size of the internal flash memory in which the HMI device image and project are stored MAC address of the H
9. Proceed as follows 1 186 Cancel the formatting procedure by pressing ESC 2 Remove the memory card from the HMI device 3 Save a backup copy of vital data to a PC 4 5 Format the memory card on the HMI device Insert the memory card into the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System Procedure Result 6 3 Contiguring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Proceed as follows 1 Press the BACKUP button to open the Select Storage Card dialog The no storage card available message appears if there is no external memory in the HMI device or if this memory is defective Insert an external memory or a different one Select the external memory for backup from the Please select a Storage Card selection field Click on the Start Backup button The HMI device checks the external memory If an external memory with a greater memory capacity is needed a message is displayed Acknowledge this message Backup is aborted Insert an external memory with a greater memory capacity and restart the backup process If the You may have an old backup on the storage card Do you want to delete it message appears there is already a backup on the external memory If you do not want to overwrite the backup press the No button Otherwise click on the Yes button Several messages are
10. The check includes Vibrations Test standard Vibration test conforming to IEC 60068 part 2 6 sinusoidal Comments Type of vibration Transitional rate of the frequency 1 octave minute 10 lt f lt 58 Constant amplitude 0 075 mm 58 lt f lt 150 Constant acceleration 1 g Vibration duration 10 frequency cycles per axis in each of the three axes vertical to each other Shock Shock testing in accordance with IEC 60068 Part 2 29 Type of shock half sine Shock intensity Peak value 15 g duration 11 ms Direction of impact 3 shocks in direction of axis in each of the three axes vertical to each other Climatic ambient conditions The HMI device may be used under the following climatic ambient conditions Ambient conditions Temperature Permissible range Comments See the Mounting positions and type of fixation section e Vertical installation 0 to 50 C e Inclined mounting 0 to 40 C Relative humidity 10 to 90 Without condensation corresponds to a relative humidity stress class 2 conforming to IEC 61131 part 2 Air pressure 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an elevation of 1000 to 2000 m Pollutant concentration SOz lt 0 5 vpm Relative humidity lt 60 no condensation H2S lt 0 1 vpm relative humidity lt 60 no condensation Check 10 vpm 4 days Check 1 vpm 4 days 40 TP 177A TP 177B OP 1
11. Press the Device status button to update the display Select the desired option under Installed options Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when the removal of an option is initiated Start the removal of the option in ProSave with the lt lt button Follow the instructions in ProSave A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 223 Commissioning a project 7 7 Transfering License Keys and Transfering Them Back Result The option has now been removed on the HMI device See also Configuring the data channel Page 172 Setting the Operating Mode Page 195 Data Transmission Options Page 197 Overview Page 221 7 7 Transfering License Keys and Transfering Them Back 7 7 1 Overview Transferring and transferring back license keys With the purchase of an optional package you obtain a specific user license with an associated license key Once you have installed an option transfer a license key to the HMI device The license key unlocks an option for use You can also transfer back the license key from the HMI device to the storage location Note You only transfer License Keys with the Automation License Manager or WinCC flexible TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 224 O
12. cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeneeseenae eats 3 Planning Use icticsitecesiscvvesieceets cove inscbevis setae dues svtenectes devs aadbtlvielivsvaseestevseadivasieiiiaens NARAIN SANEA ANES 3 1 Mounting Information scccii cc icc iassectisacceevisanteceiee ieit ariar aiie EERE EETA EE ATE EEEN 3 2 Mounting Positions and Fixation cccceeeceeceeeneeeeeeenneeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeesieeeeetiieeeeesieeeeneeeeeaa 3 3 Preparing for MOUNN asi cc ccccsscceccssacceceissceccuseanucccenssnceceisctccustaccceteadiceanaeicedsae TEERAA EET N 3 4 Specifications for Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protection 3 5 Nominal VONAQCS sessies inn ni oxcaia deus aiveyenaiecdastagadevtaandadea apeedes ag ledeutsnneshd ecteannieeetades 4 Installation and COMMOCHON isiie ccisecccccdasee teases sesscncusecessesecscddecesttdenecenvecietdinesaceded estas ai seavecesveudedbiveesaseentease 4 1 Checking the package Content ccccecteeceeneceteeceeeeeeeeeeetecaeeneseeaeneneeaaeeeeeeeneeseeceneeseseneeeeneeed 4 2 Mounting the FIM DeViCe sssini E E AEAEE 4 3 Connecting the AMI D VICG 2 jcecsecccieaet ccs aenea peedant ext cote eau dzuct apdacia fyctuasteeucate ceedauen cececn deen eee 4 3 1 Interfaces onthe TP I7 Aoise anana E E gicaetiagcgedunesedceveedutleesseuae soy 4 3 2 Interaces on the TP 1177B4 ereire NEN ANEELA EEEE RA 4 3 3 Interfaces onthe TF 17 B G ussar aR A eed Aa aa AEA 4 3 4 Interfaces on the OP 177 Buene
13. Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings is subjected to electrostatic charge The figure indicates the maximum electrostatic charge anyone is subjected to when contacting the materials shown These values correspond with specifications to IEC 801 2 kV 16 gt 45 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 510 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Relative humidity Synthetic materials Wool Antistatic materials such as wood or concrete TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Protective Measures against Discharge of Static Electricity CAUTION Grounding Measures When working with electrostatic sensitive devices make sure that the person the workplace and the packaging are properly grounded This helps to avoid electrostatic charge As a rule only touch the ESD if this is unavoidable Example for maintenance When you touch modules make sure that you do not touch the pins on the modules or the PCB tracks This prevents any discharge of static electricity to sensitive component and thus avoids damage Discharge electrostatic electricity from your body if you are performing measurements on an ESD To do so touch a grounded metallic object Always use grounded measuring instruments A 2 System Alarms Introduction System alarms on the HMI device provide informatio
14. Check if the remote server is running on the target computer TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 353 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 230304 The remote server on the addressed computer is Use a compatible remote server incompatible to VNCOCX The attempt to connect failed 230305 The authentication has failed because the Configure the correct password password is incorrect The attempt to connect failed 230306 Error in the connection to the remote server Check if This may occur as a result of network problems e the bus cable is plugged in The attempt to connect failed e there are network problems 230307 The connection to the remote server was shut down because e the remote server was shut down or e the user instructed the server to close all connections The connection is closed 230308 This alarm provides information on the connection status An attempt is made to connect 240000 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode Install the authorization You have no authorization or your authorization is corrupted 240001 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode Load an adequate authorization powerpack Too many tags are configured for the installed version 240002 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating with a Restore the full authorization
15. If battery mode is enabled the applications on the HMI device are closed after the specified interval If the port to which the UPS is connected is faulty and you therefore want to receive a message activate the Port disturbed check box Select the desired message from the selection list Enter the time after which the Faulty port message is displayed in the min and s input fields Port monitoring for the UPS is set Procedure for displaying the USP status To display the monitoring status of the USP switch to the Current Status tab If you want to refresh the display press the Update button TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 191 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 192 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 1 Overview Configuration and Process Control Phases HMI devices can be used to operate and monitor tasks in process and production automation The plant screens on the HMI devices are used to provide a clearer overview of active processes The HMI device project which includes the plant screens is created during the configuration phase Once the project is transferred to the HMI device and the HMI device is connected to a PLC in the automation system processes can be operated and monitored in t
16. The connection must be established by touching the appropriate button You may be required to enter the address of the remote HMI device and a password 2 The current screen of the ongoing project on the remote HMI device now appears on your HMI device 3 You can now monitor and control this screen according to your configuration Scroll bars are displayed if the screen of the remote HMI device is larger than that of the current HMI device Monitoring mode If the Sm rtClient view is configured for monitoring mode you can only monitor the remote HMI device You cannot control its operation Operating the function keys on the OP 177B and TP 177B 4 The following options are available for operating the function keys e When a local function is configured for the function key The function key effects your local HMI device e When no local function is configured for the function key The function key effects a remote HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 265 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Procedure Forcing Permissions If several HMI devices have access to a HMI device only one HMI device has operating permission at any one time Two cases must be distinguished for this calculation e f another HMI device is already controlling the remote HMI device you can configure for emergency situations in which your HMI
17. 290055 Message reporting that the import of data records was canceled due to an error Ensure that the structure of the data records at the storage location and the current recipe structure on the HMI device are identical 290056 Error when reading writing the value in the specified line column The action was canceled Check the specified line column 290057 The tags of the recipe specified were toggled from offline to online mode Each change of a tag in this recipe is now immediately downloaded to the controller 290058 The tags of the specified recipe were toggled from offline to online mode Modifications to tags in this recipe are no longer immediately transferred to the controller but must be transferred there explicitly by downloading a data record 290059 Message reporting that the specified data record was saved 290060 Message reporting that the specified data record memory was cleared 290061 Message reporting that clearing of data record memory was canceled due to an error 290062 The data record number is above the maximum of 65536 This data record cannot be created Select another number TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 359 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 290063 This occurs with the system function Check the ExportDataRecords syst
18. Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Configure the data channel that you want to use You can clear the required data channel by activating the associated Enable Channel check box in the Channel 1 or Channel 2 group In the Channel 1 group the RS 485 port is configured for the serial data transfer Activate the Enable Channel check box to enable the data channel Deactivate the Enable Channel check box to lock the data channel 2 Automatically configure the transfer for the data channel 2 Deactivate the Remote Control check box to disable automatic transfer Activate the Remote Control check box to enable automatic transfer Awarninc Unintentional transfer mode Ensure that the configuration PC does not inadvertently switch the HMI device to transfer mode during the open project This could cause unintentional actions to be triggered in the plant 3 Using the Advanced button go to the MPI DP Transfer Settings dialog where you can change the MPI DP settings Close the MPI DP Transfer Settings dialog after changing the MPI DP settings with OK 4 Close the Transfer Settings dialog and save your entries with to accept the entries Touch X to discard the entries Result The data channel is configured TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 94 Operating Instructions 08
19. Manufacturer site HMI device class Test number Siemens AG 177 KEMA 04ATEX1297X Industry Sector Werner von Siemens Strasse 50 D92224 Amberg Germany TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Safety Instructions and General Notes 2 3 Notes about Usage Operating conditions for Zones 2 and 22 The HMI device must be installed in some form of enclosure In accordance with EN 60529 the enclosure must guarantee the following Protection type IP54 or higher for zone 2 Protection type IP5x or higher for zone 22 Installation must ensure that at least IP65 degree of protection is given according to EN 60529 Make allowances for the ambient conditions under which you install the HMI device A manufacturer declaration must be provided for the enclosure in accordance with EC directive 94 9 stating that it is fit for purpose Follow the operating instructions to ensure that the protection type on the front panel is guaranteed The ambient temperature range is 0 C lt T lt 50 C Under these conditions the HMI device will satisfy temperature class Tx for category 3G and support a maximum surface temperature of xx C for category 3D x temperature values see design examination certificate Refer to the operating instructions for details of limitations resulting from the ambient temperature range In situations where the temperature on the
20. Overview Page 300 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View 10 6 3 Editing a recipe data record Introduction Edit the values of the recipe data records and save them in a recipe view Synchronization with the PLC If you want to display the current recipe values from the PLC in the recipe view you first have to read the current values from the PLC with iil The values changed in the recipe view only become effective when the amended data record is transferred to the PLC by means of the ain button Requirements A screen with a recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the recipe data record you want to change 3 Change the data record as required 4 Save your changes by means of the al button If you want to save the recipe data record under a different name touch the l key 5 The recipe data record is saved Result The edited recipe data record has now been saved in the selected recipe See also Overview Page 300 Recipes in the Project Page 294 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 303 Operating Recipes 10 6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View 10 6 4 Deleting a recipe data record
21. There are two ways to match the versions e Update the HMI device image if the project was created with the most recent version of the configuration software e Transfer a matching version of the HMI device image if you do not want to adapt the project for the HMI device to the most recent version of the configuration software for the project NOTICE Data loss All data on the HMI device such as the project and passwords will be deleted when you update the operating system Note Calibrating the touch screen After updating you may have to re calibrate the touch screen TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 212 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4 7 5 2 Resetting factory settings In ProSave or WinCC flexible you can update the operating system with or without resetting to the factory setting e Updating the operating system without resetting to factory settings First switch into Transfer mode on the HMI device or use the automatic transfer function if the project is active Then start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible e Updating the operating system with resetting to factory settings Note Updating the operating system by resetting to factory settings must be carried out in the following cases e No operating system is loaded on the HMI device e The operating system o
22. 1 Juice 2 Beverage 4 Nectar gt 3 Display of Values Number of the recipe data record Recipe data records Buttons for changing the displayed list and calling the menu NOTICE Changing the recipe data record in the background Applies to the processing of a recipe data record If values of the corresponding recipe data record are changed by a PLC job the recipe view is not updated automatically To update the recipe view reactivate the respective recipe data record TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 297 Operating Recipes 10 4 Displaying a Recipe Recipe screen 298 A recipe screen allows the correlation between the plant and the recipe data to be displayed in graphic form The configuration engineer combines IO fields and screen objects to form a custom input screen The configuration engineer can distribute the IO fields of a recipe over several recipe screens thus allowing recipe elements to be arranged by subject The recipe screen can be operated using buttons configured accordingly The figure below shows an example of the recipe screen Recipe name No Orange 7 1 No Data record name Nectar 7 2 Data from the PLC Data to PLC Element names and corresponding values The element name designates a specific element in the recipe data record Buttons for editing a recipe data record Modified
23. 6 3 6 Changing the HMI device settings 6 3 6 1 Setting the date and time Introduction You can set the date and time on the HMI device The HMI must be restarted in the following cases e You have changed the time zone setting e You have changed the Daylight savings time currently in effect check box setting Requirements You have opened the Date Time Properties using the Date Time Properties pa icon Date Time Properties Date Time l Ei April 2008 M 31 MDM DF SS Current Time 123 45 6 14 sgi ia io a0 920 EO 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 r F 9 i0 a SS Time Zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dabir jy 4 M Daylight savings time currently in effect el Date selection field Input field for the time Button for applying changes Time zone selection list Daylight savings check box O amp OHOBO TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 153 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Procedure Result Internal clock Proceed as follows 1 Select the appropriate time zone for the HMI device from the Time Zone selection list 2 Touch the Apply button to confirm your entry The time of day shown in the Current Time field is adjusted correspondingly to the selected time zone 3 Set the date in the selection field 4 Set the current time of day in the Current
24. 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Enter the user name and password Touch the corresponding input field The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed 2 Touch the OK button Note The user name is not case sensitive The password is case sensitive Result After successful logon to the security system you can execute password protected functions on the HMI device for which you have permissions An error message is displayed if you enter the wrong password In this case no user is logged in to the project 8 1 4 3 User logoff Requirements You have logged into the security system of the HMI device Procedure You have the following options for logging off e When no operator actions occur and the logoff time has expired the user is automatically logged off e Touching an operator control configured for logging off Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation The current user is also logged off if an incorrect password is entered Result The user is no longer logged into the project In order to operate an operator control object with password protection you must first log in again TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 240 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A 8 1 4 4 Create user Requirements New users are created in the user view To display th
25. Requirements Procedure Result See also The Network Configuration dialog has been opened with the Network ss icon OOU OO Network Configuration Adapters Identification Windows CE uses this information to gain access to network resources Enter the user name password and 4 domain provided by your network administrator User Name A mQ Password iek O Domain et Windows CE uses this information to gain access to the network resources Enter the user name password and domain you have received from your administrator Input field for the user name Input field for the password Input field for the domain Proceed as follows Enter the user name in the User name input field Touch the input field The screen keyboard is displayed Enter your password in the Password input field Touch the input field The screen keyboard is displayed Enter the domain name in the Domain input field Touch the input field The screen keyboard is displayed Close the dialog and save your entries with OR Touch X to discard the entries The logon data has now been set Overview of Network Operation Page 129 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 135 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 25 Changing Internet Settings Requirement The WinCC flexible Int
26. The Control Panel is displayed again TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Repeat the procedure with a suitable memory card 1 2 Result Using the memory card Touch the RESTORE button This message is displayed Restore started The following message appears Checking data When the data has been checked the following message appears You are starting a restore All files except those on the memory card and the registry files will be deleted Are you sure Press Yes if you want to restore the data Press No if you want to cancel the restore The messages Deleting files in the internal Flash memory and Restoring CE image are displayed in sequence once the restore process begins A progress bar shows the status of the process The restore ends with the message The restore of the CE images is completed The HMI device will now be restarted Do not remove the memory card Touch the OK button The operating system boots opening the Loader and Control Panel in sequence Two messages appear Then the final message appears Restore successfully completed Touch OK and remove memory card Touch the OK button The HMI device boots The Control Panel is displayed Remove the memory card if necessary Store the memory card in a
27. USB host maximum load 500 mA 1 x Ethernet RJ45 10 100 Mbits Supply voltage Rated voltage Range permissible 24 VDC 19 2 V to 28 8 V 20 20 Transients maximum permissible 35 V 500 ms Time between two transients minimum 50s Current consumption e Typical e Constant current maximum e Power on current surge It e approximately 200 mA e approximately 550 mA e approximately 0 1 A2s Fuse internal Electronic TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 329 Specitications 12 6 Technical specifications of the TP 177B 6 12 6 Technical specifications of the TP 177B 6 HMI device Weight without packing Approx 800 g Display Type LCD STN Display area active 115 18 mm x 86 38 mm 5 7 Resolution 320 x 240 pixels Colors displayable 256 colors for TP 177B 6 PN DP 4 colors blue mode for TP 177B 6 DP Contrast control Yes Back lighting CCFL Half Brightness Life typical 50 000 h Input unit Type Resistive analog touch screen Memory Application memory 2 MB Supply voltage Rated voltage 24 VDC Range permissible 20 4 V to 28 8 V 15 20 Transients maximum permissible 35 V 500 ms Time between two transients minimum 50s Current consumption e Typical e Constant cur
28. e Permissible surface roughness in the area of the seal lt 120 um Rz 120 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 43 Planning Use 3 3 Preparing for Mounting Dimensions of the mounting cut out The following table shows the dimensions of the mounting cut out required Mounting cut out TP 177A TP 177A vertical TP 177B 6 TP 177B 4 OP 177B horizontal mounting Horizontal horizontal Horizontal mounting mounting Width 198 1 mm 142 1 mm 198 1 mm 123 1 mm 228 1 mm Height 142 1 mm 198 mm 142 1 mm 99 mm 196 mm Depth 50 mm 50 mm 50 mm 50 mm 55 mm Maintaining clearances 44 The HMI device must be installed with the following clearances e 50 mm above and below the mounting cut out for ventilation e 15 mm to the right and left of the mounting cut out for inserting the mounting clamps for installation e Atleast 10 mm clearance in addition to the depth of the HMI device is required at the rear NOTICE Ensure that the maximum ambient temperature is not exceeded when mounting the device in a cabinet and especially in a closed enclosure TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Planning Use 3 4 Specifications for Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protection 3 4 Specifications for Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protecti
29. Introduction Create a new recipe data record in the recipe list or in the record list Then enter the values for the new record in the element list and save the record Requirement A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe list contains several recipes Select the recipe for which you want to create a new recipe data record 2 Open the recipe list menu 3 Select the menu command New A new record is created The element list of the new record opens 4 Enter values for the elements of the data record The tags of the record can be assigned default values depending on the configuration 5 Open the menu of the element list and select the command Save 6 Enter a name for the new record 7 Confirm your entries If you change the new data record number to an existing data record number the existing data record is overwritten Result The new recipe data record is saved to the selected recipe See also Overview TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 310 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 7 Operating the Simple Recipe View 10 7 3 Editing a Recipe Data Record Introduction Edit the values of the recipe data records in a simple recipe view Synchronization with the PLC If you want to display the current recipe values from the PLC in the simple recipe view you first have to read the current values from the PLC w
30. Mouse Network OP Password Printer Regional Settings S7 Transfer Settings Screen Saver System Transfer WinCC Internet Settings 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Backing up and restoring the HMI device image and the project on memory cards Setting device names for network operation Setting the date and time of day on the HMI device Configuring the screen keyboard Setting the character repeat for the screen keyboard Setting the double click on the touch screen Setting network parameters Changing screen settings displaying information about HMI device calibrating the touch screen Setting password protection for the Control Panel Configuring printers Making local region settings Setting the transfer parameters for MPI DP Configuring the screen saver Displaying information about the operating system processor and memory Configuring a data channel for the transfer Parameters for using the Internet for PN HMI devices only Proceed as follows to change settings in the Control Panel 1 You must exit the project before changing settings in the Control Panel Use the provided operating element 2 Open the Control Panel as described above 3 Open the desired dialog by double clicking on the corresponding icon in the Control Panel Enter the required password if the Control Panel is protected against unauthorized access Change settings for you
31. OP 177B TP 177B 6 TP 177B 4 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 66 nstallation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device Note when connecting See also NOTICE Only use cables with two ended grounded metal braided shielding between the HMI device and printer Use a cross cable for the Ethernet connection of the TP 177B 6 and the OP 177B when using a point to point connection The list of current printers and required settings for HMI devices can be found on the Internet under http support automation siemens com WW view en 11376409 NOTICE Rated load of the USB port Observe the values given in the specifications for the load on the USB port Loads greater than those specified may result in malfunctions in connected devices Note Documentation for peripherals Also read the documentation provided with the printer before connecting it Interfaces on the TP 177B 4 Page 51 Interfaces on the TP 177B 6 Page 52 Interfaces on the OP 177B Page 52 Specifications Page 325 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 67 Installation and connection 4 4 Switching on and Testing the HMI Device 4 4 Procedure 68 Switching on and Testing the HMI Device Proceed as follows
32. Plug connector 2 pin PIN Assignment 1 24 VDC 2 GND 24 V 12 8 2 X10 IF 1B RS 422 RS 485 Sub d socket 9 pin with screw lock PIN Assignment for the RS 422 Assignment for the RS 485 1 n c n c 2 GND 24 V GND 24 V 3 TxD Data channel B 4 RD RTS 1 5 GND 5 V floating GND 5 V floating 6 5 VDC floating 5 VDC floating 7 24 VDC out max 100 mA 24 VDC out max 100 mA 8 TxD Data channel A 9 RxD RTS 1 1 On pin 4 or pin 9 can be set with DIP switch on the rear of the device 332 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Specitications 12 8 Description of the Interfaces 12 8 3 X20 USB USB standard connector PIN Assignment 1 5 VDC out on TP 177A TP 177B 6 OP 177B 100 mA on the TP 177B 4 500 mA 2 USB DN 3 USB DP 4 GND 12 8 4 X1 PROFINET RJ45 plug connector 1 8 PIN Assignment TX TX RX n c n c RX n c ooINI JAJA JV IN gt n c Each PROFINET port features one green and one yellow LED These LEDs show the status of the PROFINET communication The following table shows the meaning of the LEDs Green LINK Yellow RX TX Meaning LED LED off off There is no PROFINET connection on off PROFINET communication possible on on Data is being sent over the PROFINET connection TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 20
33. Proceed as follows 1 If you want to enable character repetition activate the Enable character repeat check box If you want to change the delay press a button or the slider in the Repeat delay group Moving the slider to the right will shorten the delay Moving to the left will extend the delay If you want to change the repeat rate press a button or the slider in the Repeat rate group Moving the slider to the right will shorten the repeat rate Moving to the left will extend the repeat rate Touch the test field in order to check the settings The screen keyboard opens 5 Move the screen keyboard as needed 6 Press an alphanumeric key and keep the key pressed down Check the implementation of the character repetition and the rate of the character repetition in the test field 7 If the settings are not perfect correct them 8 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The character repetition and delay are set Setting the double click You can start applications in the Control Panel and in Windows CE with a double click A double click corresponds to two brief touches in sequence In the Mouse Properties dialog make the following adjustments for touch screen operation and operation with external mouse Interval between touch contacts on the touch screen Interval between mouse clicks TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1
34. TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 23 Changing Network Settings Requirement The Network Configuration dialog has been opened with the Network By icon Network Configuration Adapters Identification Lists the network drivers installed on your device AsyncMacl AsyncMacl NDISWAN Adapter SMSC1OOFD1 Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver MAC Address 08 00 06 2b ad c3 Properties H Selection for PROFINET adapters MAC address of the HMI device Button for the properties dialog Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Touch the SMSC100FD1 Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver 2 Touch the Properties button The Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver dialog is displayed Onboard LAN Ethernet Dr 04 EA IP Address Name Servers An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer Obtain an IP address via DHCP T Specify an IP address IP Address 192 168 56 wO Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 1 6 Default Gateway i l 4 SE See Address assignment setting Input field for the IP address Input field for the address of the subnet mask Input field for the address of the default gateway 0O00 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 133 Configuring the Operat
35. The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are Download the project to the HMI device again not synchronized with those in the PLC The diagnostic screens can be operated as usual ProAgent may be unable to show all diagnostic texts 320010 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are Download the project to the HMI device again not synchronized with those in STEP7 The ProAgent diagnostics data is not up to date 320011 A unit with the corresponding DB number and Check the parameters of the SelectUnit function and the FB number does not exist units selected in the project The function cannot be executed 320012 The Step sequence mode dialog is no longer Use the ZP_STEP step sequence screen from the supported corresponding standard project for your project Instead of calling the Overview_Step_Sequence_Mode function call the FixedScreenSelection function using ZP_STEP as the screen name 320014 The selected controller cannot be evaluated for Check the parameters of the EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault ProAgent system function The Alarm view assigned to the EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault system function could not be found 330022 Too many dialogs are open on the HMI device Close all dialogs you do not require on the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 361 Appendix A 2 System Alarms TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexibl
36. a plug in terminal strip e To install the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and the OP 177B Plastic mounting clamps e For the installation of the TP 177B 4 Metal mounting clamps Additional documents may be enclosed with the accessory kit 1 7 Miscellaneous RS 422 RS 232 converter PC PPI cable The converter is required to connect a SIMATIC S5 controller and controllers from other manufacturers Connect the RS 422 RS 232 converter to the RS 422 RS 485 interface The converter converts the input signals to RS 232 signals The converter is not part of the scope of delivery of the HMI device The converter can be ordered separately using order number 6AV6 671 8XE00 0AX0 You need the PC PPI cable for TP 177A TP 177B 6 and OP 177B to update the operating system by resetting it to the factory settings In addition with TP 177B and OP 177B you can use the cable for transferring purposes Connect the PC PPI cable to the RS 422 RS 485 interface The cable converts the input signals to RS 232 signals The cable is not included the scope of delivery for the HMI device The cable can be ordered separately under the order number 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 Note If the connection fails during the operating system update set the system to a lower bit rate If you use a higher bit rate you must use the PC PPI cable release 3 or higher The version code is printed on the cable e g E stand 3 corresponds to version 3 90 elbow adapter
37. e Class I Division 2 Group A B C D or e Class I Zone 2 Group IIC or non hazardous locations FM Approval APPROVED Factory Mutual Research FM conforming to e Approval Standard Class Number 3611 3600 3810 Approved for use in e Class I Division 2 Group A B C D T4 e Class I Zone 2 Group IIC T4 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 31 Safety Instructions and General Notes 2 2 Standards and Approvals Ex Certification The following certifications apply to the HMI device in accordance with e EN 60079 0 2006 e EN 60079 15 2005 e EN 61241 1 2004 e IEC 61241 0 2004 Cor 2005 valid II 3 G Ex nA II Tx x 13D Ex tD A22 IP6X T xx C x Temperature values see EU design examination certificate The EU design are available on the Internet at ign examination certifi ttp support automation siemens com The table below describes the test numbers of the HMI device classes Manufacturer site HMI device class Test number Siemens AG 177 KEMA 04ATEX1297X Industry Sector Werner von Siemens Strasse 50 D92224 Amberg Germany Label for Australia IEC 61131 32 G N117 The HMI device fulfills the requirements of standard AS NZS 2064 Class A The HMI device fulfills the requirements and criteria conforming to IEC 61131 2 Programmable Logic PLCs Part 2 Operating resource requirement
38. eee ee eneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeaaeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeessaeeeaeeeseeaaes 185 G 3 12 Backup and FeStOre 2c ccc ceetsecaseesencsntouecssctohsasenspeuitcesstecesensgssectsncanewsnelueesteadanetetansenssstentateetd 186 6 3 12 1 Saving to external storage device DACKUP c ceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeetaeeeseeaeeeseaeeeseenaeeesenaeeaaes 186 6 3 12 2 Restoring from external storage device eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeeaeeeeeeiaeeseenneeaaes 188 6 3 13 Setting the uninterruptible power SUPDIY c cccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeesecenaeeeeeeesetecaeeeeeenaness 7 COMMISSIONING A elno o meea E E GWsiecseeecevdneees ners 7 1 OVERVIOW se vsiee Gui do etsieleed E a ee ee ds 7 1 1 Setting the Operating Mode sssaaa A a EAA AAA ARAA 7 1 2 Reusing Existing Projects 20 0 cceceeseeeeeeeee erences ee seeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseneeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeteeeeneaaeees 196 7 1 3 Data Transmission Options scncese aa a aa a aa EEE 7 2 Mansi eieae E E eee pe rennet renee eet 198 7 2 1 OVGIVIEW itech tiie ei ed laden ieee en ies ddeeadg neal TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 11 Table of contents 12 7 2 2 Starting Manual Le S clic pemitne merte ee ne eene ee eee eee tern eee e ee er eer eee ere eee 199 7 2 3 Starting Automatic Transfer 200 7 2 4 Tes ng APTOS CU ae ses ag eee cece eggs ccs unirii cad te napa tice vy vale ada cnae Ph ce
39. module installed permanently on the motherboard Key on the HMI device which supports user specific functions A function is assigned to the key in the configuration The assignment of the keys may be specific to an active screen or not Half brightness lifetime Hardcopy Time period until the brightness degrades to 50 of its original value The specified value is dependent on the operating temperature Output of the screen content to a printer HMI device image Infotext IO field a file which can be transferred from the configuration computer to the HMI device The HMI device image contains the operating system and elements of the runtime software required to run a project Configured information on objects within a project An alarm infotext for example may contain information on the cause of the fault and troubleshooting routines Enables the input or output of values on the HMI device which are transferred to the controller TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 367 Glossary Notation System consisting of characters symbols and rules In particular used to define the write format of a programming language in data processing Object Component of a project Example screen or alarm Objects are used to view or enter texts and values on the HMI device Operator control object Component of a project which is used to enter values and trigger functio
40. 0 General error Restart the system 1 Wrong version 2 Profile cannot be written to the registry 3 The subnet type cannot be written to the registry 4 The Target Rotation Time cannot be written to the registry 5 Faulty Highest Address HSA 140009 Tags are not updated or written because the Reinstall the module in the Control Panel using module for S7 communication was not found Set PG PC interface 140010 No S7 communication partner found because the Switch the controller on controller is shut down DP T DP T If only one master is connected to the network disable The option PG PC is the only master is not setin PG PC is the only master in Set PG PC interface the Control Panel under Set PG PC interface If several masters are connected to the network enable these Do not change any settings for this will cause bus errors 140011 No tag updating or writing is executed because Check the connection and that the communication communication is down partner is switched on 140012 There is an initialization problem Restart the HMI device e g when WinCC flexible Runtime was closed in Or Task Manager Run WinCC flexible Runtime then start your other Or applications Another application e g STEP7 with different bus parameters is active and the driver cannot be started with the new bus parameters transmission rate for example 140013 The MPI cable is disconnected and thus there is Check
41. 1 Connect the plug in terminal strip on the HMI device 2 Restart the power supply The display lights up after power on A progress bar is displayed during startup If the HMI device does not start it is possible the wires on the terminal block have been crossed Check the connected wires and change the connections if necessary The Loader opens once the operating system has started Transfer Start Control Panel Taskbar fell The HMI device automatically switches to Transfer mode during initial startup under the following conditions No project is loaded on the device Atleast one data channel has been configured The following dialog appears Connecting to host Cancel 3 Press Cancel to stop the transfer TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Installation and connection 4 4 Switching on and Testing the HMI Device Result The Loader appears again Note When restarting the system a project may already be loaded on the HMI device In this case the project will then start after an adjustable delay or when you press the Start button Use the relevant operator control object to close the project Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic Function test Perform a function test following commissioning The HMI device is fully functional when one of t
42. 1 3 Designiof the TP 177B 6 HMI deVICG 05 33 cient ened ans Eaa aaea ANAN NE 1 4 Design of the TP 177B 4 HMI deVICG ccccccesesececceeeeecceeeteneceeteseceeeteceeeeteseaneetecenenteneaeenseeeeed 1 5 Design of the OP 177B HMI Deiter 1 6 PACCESSONOS ca eras cotd sg cede E mented tieeeteainea R E EE 1 7 Miscellaneous ce ceeee sence ee eene cece eee eeeeaeee eee eeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeesesaeeeseeaaeeeseaeeeseeaeeesenaeeeaeeeesenateeenaas 1 8 Functional scope with WinCC flexible ccccccceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeceecaeceeeeeeceeaaeeeeeeeeeeneaaeeeeeesneneeess 1 9 Software Options cecccceeccceeeeeecnec cece cece ee eeeeeeaaaeaeee sees ceaeaeceeeeeecsaaaeeeeeseeeecaaeaeeeeeeseeseeeesessenaeeeees 1 10 Communication Using the TP 177A ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeseeeaeeeseaeereeees 1 11 Communication Using the TP 177B and OP 177B 0 eeecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 2 Safety Instructions and General Notes ccccsssssccccececeeesssaseeceeeesssenaeeeeeeeesseenaeeeseesessecnaeeeeeenseeeeesesees 2 1 oale mormoone a A ene eed 2 2 Standards and Approval xeictccitecccessttecsavedlenssdcdcessannctleasagedtanardiaiaesitecvesaeastaradedaspaanlennncdcediacasaney 2 3 NOTES ADOULUSAGS sean tere ahdeace sage ddeaee inact adeata tad eehad Dede ae deed ee 2 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ccc cee aana ee E ANA AAA AEEA AA 2 5 Transport and Storage Conditions
43. 10002 Overflow of the graphics buffer for printing Up to Allow sufficient intervals between successive print jobs two images are buffered 10003 Images can now be buffered again 10004 Overflow of the buffer for printing lines in text mode Allow sufficient intervals between successive print jobs e g alarms Up to 1000 lines are buffered 10005 Text lines can now be buffered again 10006 The Windows printing system reports an error Repeat the action if necessary Refer to the output text and the error ID to determine the possible causes Nothing is printed or the print is faulty 20010 An error has occurred in the specified script line Select the specified script line in the configuration Execution of the script was therefore aborted Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types Note the system alarm that may have occurred Check system functions for the correct number and types prior to this of parameters 20011 An error has occurred in a script that was called by In the configuration select the script that has been called the specified script directly or indirectly by the specified script Execution of the script was therefore aborted in the Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types called script Check the system functions for the correct number and Take the system alarm that may have occurred type of parameters prior to this into account 20012 The configuration data is inconsistent The s
44. 177B Introduction You can import values from a CSV file to a recipe data record depending on the configuration Requirements e An operating element with the function Import data record has been configured for example a button e A screen with a recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the recipe data record to be imported 2 Operate the operating element with the function Import data record The record is imported from an external data medium as a CSV file and then displayed in the recipe view after import Result The imported recipe data record is saved on the HMI device Deviating structure If the structure of the CSV file differs from the structure of the recipe deviations are handled as follows e Any additional values in the CSV file will be rejected e The system applies the configured default value to the recipe data record if the CSV file contains an insufficient number of values e Ifthe CSV file contains values of the wrong data type the configured default value is set in the recipe data record Example The imported CSV file contains values that were entered as floating point numbers However the corresponding tag expects an integer value In this case the system discards the imported value and uses the configured default See also Recipes in the Project Page 294 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexib
45. 177B 6 and OP 177B Switching between Screen Keyboards Pard switches between the alphanumerical and numerical screen keyboards Le switches between the normal level and Shift level of the alphanumerical screen keyboard ea activates and deactivates the numerical and alphanumerical keys of the alphanumerical screen keyboard e _ switches from full display to reduced display e E switches from reduced display to full display x closes the reduced display of the screen keyboard Moving the Screen Keyboard on the Touch Screen You can move the screen keyboard if it blocks you from operating a dialog in any way 1 Touch E Keep touch contact to move the screen keyboard on the touch screen Release touch contact on the icon when the required position is reached 6 2 2 3 Configuring the Screen Keyboard Introduction In the Control Panel you can configure the screen keyboard that is used to make entries outside an open project Requirement The Siemens HMI Input Panel Options dialog has been opened with the f Position and Size i FELLE HH Currently close Open Input Panel o Save current size and position Save L O Button for displaying the screen keyboard Button for saving the screen keyboard TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 101 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating syste
46. 177B and OP 177B 10 8 Exporting Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP 177B Introduction You can export one or more recipe data records to a CSV file depending on the configuration After export the values in the recipe data record can be further processed ina spreadsheet program such as MS Excel The degree to which you can influence the export depends on the configuration Requirements e A screen with a recipe view is displayed e An operating element with the function Export record has been configured e The following tags are configured equally in the recipe view and for the Export record operating element Recipe number Data record number Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the recipe data record you want to export 3 Operate the operating element which was configured for export for example the Export data record button The data record is exported as a CSV file to an external data medium Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Result The recipe data record is exported See also Recipes in the Project Page 294 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 315 Operating Recipes 10 9 Importing Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP 177B 10 9 Importing Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP
47. 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A General information See also NOTICE Transfer mode using MPI PROFIBUS DP The bus parameters for MPI PROFIBUS DP transfer e g the MPI PROFIBUS DP address of the HMI device will be read from the project currently loaded on the HMI device You can change the settings for MPI PROFIBUS DP transfer To do this you must first end the project and then change the settings on the HMI device Then return to Transfer mode During the transfer of a project to the HMI device the MPI DP settings will be overwritten with the values from the transferred project Transfer settings A project can only be transferred from the configuration PC to the HMI device when at least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device Changing MPI DP Settings Page 91 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 95 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 1 Overview Loader The figure below shows the Loader The Loader buttons have the following functions e Use the Transfer button to set Transfer mode on the HMI device The transfer mode can only be activated when at least one data channel has been enabled f
48. 22 If space is limited e g to install the TP 177A in vertical format you can use an elbow adapter at the RS 422 RS 485 interface The adapter is not part of the scope of delivery of the HMI device The adapter can be ordered separately with order number 6AV6 671 8XDO00 0XA0 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Overview 7 8 Functional scope with WinCC flexible PROFIBUS bus connector We recommend using straight PROFIBUS bus connectors The connectors are not included in the scope of supply for the HMI device The connectors can be ordered separately with order number 6GK1 500 0FC10 Memory card Only use SD memory cards or MultiMediaCards tested and approved by Siemens AG for the respective HMI device Protective foil Protective foil is available for the HMI devices Suitable protective foil can be ordered separately under the following order numbers e TP 177A TP 177B 6 OP 177B Order number 6AV6 671 2XC00 0AX0 e TP 177B 4 Order number 6AV6 671 2ECO0 0AX0 Protective cover set A protective cover set can be ordered for the TP 177A and TP 177B 6 HMI devices with the order number 6AV6 574 1AE00 4AX0 1 8 Functional scope with WinCC flexible General The following tables show the objects which can be integrated in a project for a TP 177A TP 177B and OP 177B Note The specified values are maximum values for the respective objects It is not pos
49. Class 3K3 climatic requirements Use with Additional Measures Examples of applications where the use of the HMI device requires additional measures e In locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation e In locations with extreme operating conditions resulting from situations such as the following Corrosive vapors gases oils or chemicals Electrical or magnetic fields of high intensity e In plants requiring special monitoring features for example Elevator systems Systems in especially hazardous rooms Mechanical ambient conditions The mechanical ambient conditions for the HMI device are specified in the following table in terms of sinusoidal vibration Frequency range Constant Intermittent in Hz 10 lt f lt 58 Amplitude 0 0375 mm Amplitude 0 075 mm 58 lt f lt 150 Constant acceleration 0 5 g Constant acceleration 1 g TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 39 Planning Use 3 1 Mounting Information Reduction of Vibration If the HMI device is subjected to greater shocks or vibrations you must take appropriate measures to reduce acceleration or amplitudes We recommend fitting the HMI device to vibration absorbent material on metal shock absorbers for example Testing for Mechanical Ambient Conditions The following table provides information on the type and scope of tests for mechanical ambient conditions
50. Commissioning a project 7 5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Procedure Restoring factory settings Proceed as follows 1 From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC 2 Select the HMI device type from the General tab and select Ethernet from the Connection area 3 Enter an IP address Note Possible address conflicts with incorrect IP address Do not use a dynamic IP configuration for Reset to factory settings Specify a unique IP address of the subnet in which the configuration PC is located For the duration of the update process the HMI device is automatically assigned to the specified address of ProSave If the HMI device has already been used with WinCC flexible or ProSave you can use the existing IP address for Reset to factory settings a SIMATIC ProSave Fie Language Help F Backup Restore Options OS Update Device type Operator Panel Connection Ethernet v Connection parameters P address Computer name Ethernet TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 219 Commissioning a project 7 5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Result 220 Change to the OS Update tab Activate the Reset to factory settings check box A text box opens where you can enter the MAC address Enter the HMI device s MAC address in the text box In Image path select the HMI devic
51. Contiguring the Operating System Requirement Procedure Result 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Ss You have opened the Mouse Properties dialog with the Mouse icon Mouse Properties Double Click Double click this grid to set the double click sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between clicks S Double click this icon to test your double click settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the oO grid above Pattern Icon Proceed as follows 1 Click the pattern twice After one double click the grid is shown in inverse colors The white fields change to grey The time before the second click is saved Bo 2 Check the double click Click on the icon twice in succession to do this If the double click is recognized the icon is displayed as follows cok 3 If the settings are not perfect correct them To do this repeat steps 1 to 2 4 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The double click adjustment is completed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 149 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 4 4 Calibrating the touch screen Introduction Requirement Procedure 150 Depending on the mounting position and viewing angle it is possible that parallax may occur
52. Deteeeneae FF Repeat rate Slow Tap here and hold down a key to Check box for activating the character repeat Slider control and buttons for the delay time before character repeat Slider control and buttons for the rate of the character repeat Test field You can change the settings in the Keyboard Properties dialog with the buttons or the slide bar Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Specify whether or not the character repeat of the keyboard should be activated Activate the Enable character repeat check box to enable the character repeat Deactivate the Enable character repeat check box to disable the character repeat 2 Use the buttons or slide bar to set the use and rate of the character repeat 3 Verify your settings Touch the test field The screen keyboard opens Move the screen keyboard as needed Touch any character and keep it pressed Check the activation of the character repeat and its rate in the test field Correct your setting if necessary 4 Close the dialog and save your entries with OR Touch X to discard the entries Result The character repeat for the keyboard is now set TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 103 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 5 Setting the Double click on the Touch Screen Introduction Requirement Proce
53. Ethernet IP 5 GE Fanuc Automation PLC series 90 30 90 70 90 Micro SNP 4 6 LG Industrial Systems Lucky Goldstar IMO PLC series GLOFA GM G4 G6 G7M Dedicated communication 4 6 Mitsubishi Electric PLC series MELSEC FX MELSEC FXO FX Mitsubishi PG 4 Mitsubishi Melsec PLC series FX A Ans Q QnAS Protocol 4 4 8 Modicon Schneider Automation PLC series Modicon 984 TSX Quantum and TSX Compact PLC series Quantum Momentum Premium und Micro PLC series Compact and 984 via Ethernet bridge e Modbus RTU 46 e Modbus TCP IP Ethernet 5 OMRON PLC series SYSMAC C SYSMAC CV SYSMAC CS1 SYSMAC alpha CP Hostlink Multilink SYSMAC Way 49 Telemecanique PLC series e TSX 7 with P47 411 e TSX 7 with P47 67 87 107 420 e TSX 7 with P47 67 87 107 425 e Module TSX SCM 21 6 with the aforementioned TSX 7 CPUs e TSX 17 with module SCG 1161 e TSX 37 Micro e TSX 57 Premium Uni Telway 4 Applies to controllers SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 MicroLogix 2 Applies to controllers SLC504 via DF 1 3 Only with converter RS 422 RS 232 6AV6 671 8XE00 0AX0 Option 4 PROFINET IO must be locked 5 Not approved for TP 177B 6 DP or OP 177B DP 6 Deactivate the Remote Control check box under Channel 1 in the Transfer Settings TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Safety Instructions and Gene
54. HMI device may only be repaired there The address is Siemens AG Industry Sector Returns Center Siemensstrasse 2 90766 Furth Germany Additional Information Approval 2 4 Introduction Please also observe the product information Use in potentially explosive atmospheres zones 2 and 22 The product information is located on the mini CD that is enclosed with the HMI device upon delivery Note HMI devices with approval to Il 3G Ex nA II T4 may only be used on SIMATIC systems of device category 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility The HMI device fulfills requirements of the EMC directive of the domestic European market and other requirements EMC compliant mounting of HMI devices 36 EMC compliant mounting of the HMI device and the use of interference proof cables will ensure trouble free operation The Directives for Interference free installation of PLCs and the PROFIBUS Networks manual also apply for the installation of the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Safety Instructions and General Notes 2 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility Pulse shaped Interference The following table shows the EMC properties of the modules with respect to pulse shaped interference The HMI device must fulfill the specifications and directives relating to electrical installation as a basic prerequisite Pulse shaped Tested with Corresponds to tes
55. HMI device recipe memory The recipe data can also be saved in recipe tags Recipe view recipe screen On the HMI device recipes are displayed and edited in the recipe view or ina recipe screen The recipe data records from the internal memory of the HMI device are displayed and edited in the recipe view The values of the recipe tags are displayed and edited in the recipe screen Note The same recipe tags can be configured in a variety of recipes If you modify the value of a recipe tag the synchronization changes the value of the recipe tag in all recipes Recipe tags on the TP 177A The recipe tags contain recipe data Recipe tags configured in IO fields are always automatically synchronized with the recipe view You can exchange the values of the recipe tags with the PLC Recipe tags on the TP 177B and OP 177B The recipe tags contain recipe data When you edit recipes in a recipe screen the recipe values are stored in recipe tags The recipe tags are not automatically synchronous with the recipe view You can synchronize the recipe tags with the recipe data records so that the same values are saved in both Depending on the configuration the values of the recipe tags are exchanged with the PLC External storage medium on the TP 177B and OP 177B You can store recipe data records on the memory card of the TP 177B and OP 177B On the TP 177B 4 you can also save the recipe data records on a USB stick Rec
56. Information 135 6 2 2 25 Changing Internet Settings 2 0 0 2 eee ee eeee cece eeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseaaeeeseeaeeeeenaeeaaeeeeseaaes 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 1 OADM coe setcties iestesieicades nncdaget E adecehdcnsapeeatises stand 6 3 2 Setting up and disabling SecureMode ee ceeceeeeeeceenneeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeseenaeeesenaeeeees 6 3 3 Control Panel sei ccscesisscccesctescdevueceeacendcceeeedenecedncenegecehdegeubenesdeessevenanaeaducnansdecenesaecenduancunedeencendzenanad 6 9 9 1 OVGRVIGW ririn ea ann a se Ea Te iati Vedas a a AAE EGAS 141 6 3 3 2 Opening the Control Panel eseeessseecesrsseereseererreernneeirnsarinnastenaetrnnadtdanaatnnaatunaaatnnneteaaaaanaaeennaaed 0 3 3 3 Reference for TUNCUONS 2 scceene fon ceseespoenede ccaveeatin cexeveunseseereeresvens secebeansuiena eed aseddemareeersebiaueenaee 6 3 3 4 Operator control options for the Control Panel ececccccceceeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesetenneeeeeesenees 6 3 3 5 Operating the Control Panel with the touch screen cccccectec ects cnseteeceeenectaeeaeeaeeneenseeneens 144 6 3 4 Changing Settings Tor operatio essesi e veneer taker SAEN AA O KASA ind 146 6 3 4 1 Configuring the screen keyboard 2 00 eee eeeeeeeceeee cent ee eeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeseeaeeeeesieeeeeeesenaaes 6 3 4 2 Setting the character repeat cccccceccccsecneeee cesses cneeceeeecnsetaeeseeecnsetseceenestsecect
57. Mode and Speed Automatic With this setting the HMI device detects the data rate and the speed of communication via the Ethernet and automatically employs it If you do not want to use these settings select the required combination of data rate and transmission speed in the selection list Confirm your entries The dialog closes Close the Network amp Dial Up Connections display The Control Panel is displayed again The LAN connection parameters for the HMI device have been changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 11 4 Changing the logon data Introduction Windows CE uses this logon data to gain access to the network resources Enter the user name password and domain you have received from your administrator Requirements You have opened the Owner Properties dialog with the Network ID 25 icon Owner Properties Network ID l Windows CE uses this information to gain access to network resources Enter the user name password and domain provided by your network administrator User name Password Domain Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Enter the user name in the User name text box Enter your password in the Password text box Enter the domain name in the Domain text box AUN Confirm your entries The d
58. Rated voltage 24 VDC Range permissible 20 4 V to 28 8 V 15 20 Transients maximum permissible 35 V 500 msec Time between two transients minimum 50s Current input e Typical e Constant current maximum e Power on current surge It e Approx 300 mA e Approx 450 mA e Approx 0 5 A2s Fuse internal Electronic See also Standards and Approvals Page 30 Electromagnetic Compatibility Page 36 Transport and Storage Conditions Page 38 Mounting Information Page 39 Specifications for Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protection Page 45 328 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Specitications 12 5 Technical specifications of the TP 177B 4 12 5 Technical specifications of the TP 177B 4 HMI device Weight without packing Approximately 500 g Display Type LCD TFT Display area active 95 mm x 53 mm 4 3 wide screen Resolution 480 x 272 pixels Colors displayable 256 Brightness control yes Backlighting LED Half Brightness Life Time typical 30 000 h Pixel error class according to DIN EN ISO 13406 2 Input unit Type Resistive analog touch screen Memory Application memory 2 MB Interfaces 1 x RS 422 RS 485 Max 12 Mbit s applies to DP operations 1 x USB 1 1
59. Recipe View Menu commands 309 Operator controls 308 Slider control 2 262 Appearance Sm rtAccess 26 Sm rtClient view 265 Monitoring mode 265 Use Sm rtService 26 2 SMTP server 136 184 Software options 26 Specifications TP 177A Start HMI device 162 Starting HMI device 112 Status force 263 Operating elements Status force view 263 Storage conditions 38 Storage device Restoring from external 188 Saving to external 186 Storage directories Storage location Setting Subnet mask 134 18 181 Supply voltage TP 177B 6 Support On the Internet 7 Switching off HMI device 69 Switching on HMI device 68 Symbolic screen keyboard symbolic values Changing Entering Symbolic values 231 Changing 258 Entering ae Recipe tag System TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 System alarms Parameter 337 System features System sll Displaying 1 165 16 166 System yno pe 143 Device name General 165 Memory 166 T Tags 24 Taskbar 138 TCP IP address Technical Boa ati Display 328 329 330 331 Input unit 328 329 330 has Interfaces 329 Memory 328 329 330 PROFINET interac OP 177B 331 RJ45 interface 333 Technical Support 7 86 Temporary files Backup Testing HMI device 68 Text box 2 Third party controllers Protocols 28 Time Enterin Setting apr
60. Select a memory location from the Project Backup input field The external memory card or the location in the data network can be defined as the storage location During the next backup process the project s source file is stored in the specified location 2 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The storage location for the source file is now set TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 8 Setting the delay time Introduction Requirements Procedure Result Once the HMI device has been switched on a project can be started after a delay The Loader is displayed during the delay time You have opened the Transfer Settings dialog Directories tab with the i Transfer t5 icon Transfer Settings Channel Directories l Project File Flash Simatic Project Backup Storage Card MMC Simatic NOTICE Settings under Project File and Path The project may not open the next time the HMI device is started if changes are made in the Project File and Path text boxes Do not change the entries in the Project File and Path text boxes 1 Select the desired delay time in seconds from the Wait sec selection list With the value 0 the project starts immediately It is then no longer possible to call the Loader after swit
61. Status Changing e mail settings Email a ging g 1 Additional tabs may appear in the WinCC flexible Internet Settings dialog This depends on the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 143 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 3 4 Operator control options for the Control Panel Entries using the touch screen The operating elements shown in the dialogs are touch sensitive Touch objects are basically operated in the same way as mechanical keys You activate operating elements by touching them with your finger To double click them touch an operating element twice in succession Entries using an external USB keyboard An external keyboard can be used to operate the Control Panel in exactly the same way as the HMI device keyboard Use the keys of the external keyboard which correspond to the HMI device keys in the description Operating using an external USB mouse An external mouse can be used to operate the Control Panel in exactly the same way as the HMI device touch screen Click the described operating elements with the mouse 6 3 3 5 Operating the Control Panel with the touch screen Introduction The control panel is operated with the HMI device touch screen or a connected mouse Requirement An active project has
62. TP 177B 4 Select devices for transfer Device_1 Operator Panel Settings for Device_1 Transfer to Flash RAM Y Delta transfer On Oot Computer name re 1 92 1681 10 C Enable back transfer Overwrite password list Overwrite recipe data records 4 Confirm your entries In WinCC flexible select the command Update OS in the Project gt Transfer menu Activate the Reset to factory settings check box A text box opens where you can enter the MAC address 7 Enter the HMI device s MAC address in the text box 8 In Image path select the HMI device image file img The HMI device image files are available under WinCC flexible Images in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD In the output area you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image file after it is opened 9 In WinCC flexible select Update OS on the configuring PC to run the operating system update 10 In the Control Panel of the HMI device open the OP Properties dialog and select the Device tab 11 Click on the Reboot button A query is opened 12 Click on the Prepare for Reset button 13 On the configuration PC follow the instructions in WinCC flexible During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 217 Commissioning a
63. The Authentication text box can remain empty if your e mail provider allows you to send mail without checking the account 4 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The e mail settings have been changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 11 6 Importing and deleting certificates Overview You can import view and delete certificates that have been imported for the HMI device The certificates differ in the following ways e Certificates that you trust e Own certificates e Other certificates You can import additional certificates and delete certificates that are not required The required settings can be obtained from your network administrator Requirements You have opened the Certificates dialog with the Certificates eS icon Certificates OK Stores Lists the certificates LY trusted by you Trusted Authorities Class 2 Public Primary Certification Authority Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority Entrust net Certification Authority 2048 Entrust net Secure Server Certification Authorit Equifax Secure Certificate Authority GlobalSign Root CA x Import view Remove Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Select the type of certificate from the selection list Trusted Authorities My Certificates Other Certifica
64. The SIMATIC S7 MultiMedia card can no longer be used If you format a MultiMedia card for the SIMATIC S7 in the HMI device this MultiMedia card can no longer be used in the SIMATIC S7 Only use MultiMedia cards that are approved for the HMI device Procedure Inserting a memory card The memory card can be inserted during operation Proceed as follows 1 Insert the memory card in the slot until it stops When inserting the memory card please note that it can only be inserted in the slot when the front side of the memory card is visible 2 Check that the memory card is properly seated TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 76 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operator Controls and Displays 5 3 Insert a memory card in the TP 177B 4 Using a memory card for the first time NOTICE Data loss When requested by the HMI device to format a memory card for first time use you should save a backup copy of memory card data to a PC Proceed as follows to prevent data loss 1 Cancel the formatting procedure by pressing ESC 2 Save a backup copy of vital data to a PC 3 Format the memory card on the HMI device 4 If you require on the HMI device data that has been saved on the PC transfer the data back to the memory card You can now transfer the backup data from the memory card to the HMI device Procedure removing a memory card NOTICE Loss of data po
65. The right window displays the available license keys Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the destination drive in the left window The license keys are transferred back to the storage location The license key is transferred back from the HMI device to the storage location Overview Page 224 Configuring the data channel Page 172 Setting the Operating Mode Page 195 Data Transmission Options Page 197 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A 8 1 1 Overview Using Operator Controls on the Touch Screen Operator controls are touch sensitive objects on the HMI screen such as buttons I O fields and alarm windows Touch objects are basically operated in the same way as mechanical keys You activate operator controls by touching them with your finger Some operations with the project may require in depth knowledge about the specific plant on the part of the operator It is therefore important to take special care for example in displaying typing Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation caution Always touch only one operator control on the screen Never touch more than one operator control at a time otherwise you may trigger unintentional actions CAUTION Do not use any pointed or sharp objects when operating the touc
66. Time text box 5 Touch the Apply button to confirm your input The values you have set are now in effect Note The system does not automatically switch between winter and summer time 6 If you want to switch from winter to summer time activate the Daylight savings time currently in effect check box When you press the Apply button the time is brought forward by one hour 7 If you want to switch from summer to winter time deactivate the Daylight savings time currently in effect check box When you press the Apply button the time is moved backwards by one hour 8 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The settings for the data and time of day have now been changed The HMI device has an internal buffered clock The buffering is time restricted Synchronizing the date and time with the PLC 154 The date and time of the HMI device can be synchronized with the PLC if this has been configured in the project and the PLC program Further information on this subject is available in the WinCC flexible system manual NOTICE Time dependent reactions You have to synchronize the date and time when time controlled responses are triggered in the PLC by the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 6 2 Changing regional setti
67. Transfer Settings dialog has been opened with the Transfer t icon You have opened the Directories tab Transfer Settings Channel Directories Project File Flash Simatic Project Backup Autostart application Path Flash Simatic HmiRTm exe Memory location for the project file Memory location for the compressed source file of your project for backtransfer The external memory card or the network connections can be defined as the memory location During the next backup process the project s source file is stored in the specified location Storage location and initialization file of the HMI device for process operation Selection list for the delay time NOTICE Settings in Project File and Path Do not change the setting in the Project File and Path fields if you are working on a project The project may not open at the next start of the HMI if changes are made here Procedure for setting the delay time 1 Touch the Wait sec section list A selection list is displayed Select the desired delay time With the value 0 the project starts immediately It is then no longer possible to call the loader after switching on the HMI device If you still wish to access the loader an operating element must be configured to close the project 2 Close the dialog and save your entries with OR Touch X to discard the entries Result The delay time for the HMI devi
68. address Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 and then type it in the space provided Default Gateway ran 2 If you need automatic issuing of addresses select the Obtain an IP address via DHCP radio button 3 If you need manual issuing of addresses select the Specify an IP address radio button 4 If you have selected manual issuing of addresses enter the corresponding addresses in the following input fields IP Address Subnet Mask If necessary Default Gateway TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 181 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Result 182 5 6 If a name server is used in the network change to the Name Servers tab LAN9115 Settings oki x IP Address Name Servers Ethernet Parameters Name server addresses may be Primary DNS ara automatically assigned if DHCP is enabled on this adapter Secondary DNS You can specify additional A le fe el WINS or DNS resolyers in the Primary WINS space provided Secondary WINS If you wish to change the Ethernet settings switch to the Ethernet Parameters tab LAN9115 Settings IP Address Name Servers Ethernet Parameters Port Port1 Mode and Speed Automatic For the data rate and the transmission speed of the Ethernet connection the following is set as default
69. an input field or a date time field The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete Ti Ei es fe HEA mj rea Buie hitt PGE BE tsk Ee EREE pfs Note Opened screen keyboard When the screen keyboard is open PLC job 51 Select screen has no function Language change Language change in the project has no influence on the alphanumerical screen keyboard The entry of Cyrillic or Asian characters is therefore not possible Keyboard levels All the keys on the screen keyboard are divided over several levels Using the keys in the fourth row of the keyboard you can toggle between levels whilst inputting The following table shows the levels of the screen keyboard and the associated calls 256 Name Available keys Call Normal level a to m Lowercase letters from a to m AM Shift level A to M Uppercase letters from A to M AM Shift Normal level n to z Lowercase letters from n to z NZ Shift level N to Z Uppercase letters from N to Z NZ Shift Normal level 0 to 9 Digits from 0 to 9 0 9 Normal level Special characters Hr Shift level Special characters r Shit TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Procedure The required values can be entered character by character using the screen keyboard
70. another name Overwrite the data record change the data record number or cancel the action 290075 A data record with this name already exists The data record is not saved Please select a different data record name 300000 Faulty configuration of process monitoring e g using PDiag or S7 Graph More alarms are queued than specified in the specifications of the CPU No further ALARM_S alarms can be managed by the PLC and reported to the HMI devices Change the controller configuration 300001 ALARM_S is not registered on this controller Select a controller that supports the ALARM_S service 310000 An attempt is being made to print too many reports in parallel Only one log file can be output to the printer at a given time the print job is therefore rejected Wait until the previous active log was printed Repeat the print job if necessary 310001 An error occurred on triggering the printer The report is either not printed or printed with errors Evaluate the additional system alarms related to this alarm Repeat the print job if necessary 360 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 320000 The movements have already been indicated by Deselect the movements on the other display units another devic
71. are for example a jog mode requirement NOTICE Direct keys are still active when the HMI device is in offline mode NOTICE If you operate a function key with direct key functionality in a running project the direct key function is always executed independent of the current screen contents Note You can only use direct keys when there is a connection via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO Direct keys result in additional basic load on the HMI device The following objects can be configured as a direct key e Buttons e On TP 177B 4 and OP 177B Function keys You can also define image numbers in the case of HMI devices with touch operation In this way you can configure the direct keys on an image specific basis Further information on configuring direct keys can be found in the WinCC flexible Communication system manual 249 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 4 Setting the project language Introduction Requirements The HMI device supports multilingual projects You need to configure a corresponding operator control object which lets you change the language setting on the HMI device during runtime The project always starts with the language set in the previous session e The relevant project language must be available on the HMI device e The language changeover function must be logically linked to a configured operator control object su
72. be configured for operator controls such as buttons The infotext of the selected operator control can be displayed by pressing a configured function key Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic Infotext for the Current Screen Infotext can also be configured for screens The infotext for the current screen is called up or by the screen keyboard or by an operator control object assigned to this function Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic Closing the Infotext Close the infotext with X TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 259 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 6 Operating a Gauge Introduction The gauge displays analog numerical values using a pointer The operator at the HMI device can thus see at a glance for example that the boiler pressure is in the normal range SIMATIC Appearance The appearance of the gauge depends on the configuration e A trailing pointer can display the maximum value reached so far on the scale The trailing pointer is reset when the screen is reloaded e The label on the scale can show the measured variable e g boiler pressure and the physical unit e g bar Operation The gauge is for display only and cannot be controlled by the operator TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 260 Operating Ins
73. commands 309 Operator controls 301 Simple 297 Recipes 25 Recommissioning HMI device Record list 297 309 Regional and language settings 143 Regional settings Changing Registry information Backup 110 Registry Information Backup 156 Remote control Forcing permission Removing Option 222 Representatives Resetting to factory settings 209 Restore 142 from memory card 1C Restoring 207 from external storage device 142 From memory card 156 With ProSave With WinCC flexible 205 Reverse polarity protection 56 RJ45 plug connector Pin assignment 3 RS 422 RS 232 converter Ruler 245 S S7 transfer settings Safety instruction Backlighting Changed tag name 305 Cold restart Compatibility conflict 203 Data channel 208 2 377 Index Data loss Device name Direct key 249 Functional problem 65 General License key 213 Loss of data possible Memory card 75 Memory distribution Path 168 Power failure 2 Preventing inadvertent operation B17 Project file 168 Recipe data record in background Remote control for channel 1 Time dependent reactions Transfer mode 17 Transfer mode channel 2 unauthorized cleaning products 3 Unintentional response 317 Unintentional transfer mode USB connection sequence USB port 65 Safety instructions High frequency radiation 29 Potentially explosive atmosphere 33 Working on the control cabinet 29 Screen
74. displayed on the Windows CE desktop For more information refer to the Changing password protection Page 151 section If you now operate a function in the taskbar or the desktop you must enter a password After entering the password the label secure mode is no longer displayed All functions in the taskbar and the desktop can now be operated To reactivate SecureMode double click the symbol on the desktop The label secure mode will be shown again The HMI device is protected again Disabling SecureMode To completely disable SecureMode delete the password TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 140 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 3 Control Panel 6 3 3 1 Overview The HMI device s Control Panel is similar to the control panel on a PC The Control Panel looks like this f amaa Ss ae ey 9 Backup Rest Certificates Date Time InputPanel Keyboard Mouse e at Network and Network ID Password Printer PROFINET Dial up Co og Pa Sac a tae l Regional S Transfer ScreenSaver System Transfer UPS Settings Settings ay Winte Internet Settings The control panel can be used to modify the following settings e Date and time e Screen saver e Regional settings e Transfer settings e Network settings e Delay time e Password TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B W
75. exporting it Check if the storage medium is correctly inserted 80048 80049 The log could not be renamed while preparing to Check if the storage medium is correctly inserted and if export it there is sufficient space on the medium The job can not be completed 80050 The log which shall be exported is not closed Make sure the CloseAll Logs system function is called The job can not be completed before using the ExportLog system function Change the configuration as required 90024 No operator actions can be logged due to lack of Make more space available by inserting an empty storage space on the storage medium for log The operator medium or swapping out the log files on the server using action will therefore not be executed ExportLog 90025 Because of error state of the archive no user Check if the storage medium is correctly inserted actions can be logged Therefore the user action will not be executed 90026 No operator actions can be logged because the log Before further operator actions are carried out the log is closed The operator action will therefore not be must be opened again using the system function executed OpenAllLogs Change the configuration as required 90029 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation Ensure that you are using the correct storage medium perhaps due to a power failure or an a storage medium in use is incompatible with Audit Trail An Audit Trail is not suitable if
76. instructions in ProSave A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation The system outputs a message when the backup is completed The relevant data is now backed up on the PC 206 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 3 Backup and Restore Procedure for restoring Proceed as follows 1 Result From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC 2 Select the HMI device type in the General tab 3 Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC 4 5 Select the psb backup file to be restored from the Restore tab Set the connection parameters You will receive information for which HMI device the backup file was created and which type of backup data are available in the file If you are working on a TP 177A with WinCC flexible 2008 or higher and want to restore recipes in CSV format then select one or more CSV files from the source directory Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when a restore operation is initiated Start the restore operation in ProSave on the PC with Start Restore If there are license keys both on the HMI device and in the backup a dialog box will appear Use this dialog to establish whether you want to overwrite the license keys or abort the restor
77. is active and there is not enough working memory the SIMATIC HMI runtime and therefore the current project will be closed 2 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result Memory management is activated TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 167 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 7 Setting storage location Introduction Requirements Procedure Result 168 There are various storage locations available for storing the compressed source file of your project The following describes how you can set the storage location You have opened the Transfer Settings dialog Directories tab with the E Transfer 2 3 icon Transfer Settings Channel Directories Project File Flashisimatic Project Backup Autostart application Path Flash Simatic HmiRTm exe Wait sec 3 z Memory location for the project file Memory location for the compressed source file of your project for backtransfer Storage location and initialization file of the HMI device for process operation NOTICE Settings under Project File and Path The project may not open the next time the HMI device is started if changes are made in the Project File and Path text boxes Do not change the entries in the Project File and Path text boxes 1
78. lt 1m Temperature from 20 to 60 C Air pressure from 1080 to 660 hPa corresponds to an elevation of 1000 to 3500 m Relative humidity from 10 to 90 without condensation Sinusoidal vibration conforming to 5 to 8 4 Hz 3 5 mm IEC 60068 2 6 8 4 Hz to 150 Hz 9 8 m s Shock conforming to IEC 60068 2 29 250 m s2 6 ms 1000 shocks NOTICE Ensure that no condensation dewing develops on or inside the HMI device after transporting it at low temperatures or after it has been exposed to extreme temperature fluctuations The HMI device must have acquired room temperature before it is put into operation Do not expose the HMI device to direct radiation from a heater in order to warm it up If dewing has developed wait approximately four hours until the HMI device has dried completely before switching it on Prerequisite for the trouble free and safe operation of the HMI device is proper transport and storage installation and assembly and careful operation and maintenance Warranty for the HMI device is deemed void if these specifications are ignored TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Planning Use 3 1 Mounting Information Mechanical and Climatic Conditions of Use The HMI device is intended for installation in weatherproof permanent locations The conditions of use are compliant with requirements to DIN IEC 60721 3 3 e Class 3M3 mechanical requirements e
79. operation and maintenance All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG Ordernumber 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Copyright Siemens AG 2008 Industry Sector 08 2008 Technical data subject to change Postfach 48 48 90327 NURNBERG GERMANY Preface Purpose of the Operating Instructions These operating instructions provide information based on the requirements defined by DIN EN 62079 for mechanical engineering documentation The information relates to the HMI device its place of use transportation storage installation use and maintenance These operating instructions are intended for e Users e Commissioning engineers e Service technicians e Maintenance technicians Please read the section Safety instructions and general notes carefully The help integrated in WinCC flexible the WinCC flexible Information System contains detailed information The information system contains in
80. program 210006 An error occurred while attempting to execute the control request As a result the control request is not executed Observe the next previous system alarms Check the parameters of the control request Recompile the configuration TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 351 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 220001 The tag is not downloaded because the associated Change the configuration communication driver HMI device does not support the download of Boolean discrete data types 220002 The tag is not downloaded because the associated Change the configuration communication driver HMI device does not support write access to the data type BYTE 220003 The communication driver cannot be loaded Install the driver by reinstalling WinCC flexible Runtime The driver may not be installed 220004 Communication is down and no update data is Check the connection transferred because the cable is not connected or defective etc 220005 Communication is up 220006 The connection between the specified PLC and the specified port is active 220007 The connection to the specified controller is Check if interrupted at the specified port e the cable is plugged in e the controller is OK e the correct port is used e your configuration is OK inte
81. progress of the installation TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 221 Commissioning a project 7 6 Installing and Removing Options Result The option has now been installed on the HMI device Procedure for removing an option Proceed as follows 1 On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens 2 Select the type of HMI device 3 Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC then set the connection parameters Close the dialog with OK Select the Options command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible Select the desired option under Installed options N On fF Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when the removal of an option is initiated 8 Start the removal of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC with the lt lt button Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal Result The option has now been removed on the HMI device See also Configuring the data channel Page 172 Setting the Operating Mode Page 195 Data Transmission Options Page 197 Overview Page 221 TP 177A TP 177B OP 1
82. recipe view Buttons for transferring recipe data O00 oO The values displayed or entered in the recipe screen are saved in recipe tags The recipe values are exchanged with the PLC immediately or later via these tags A configured recipe view can itself be a component of a recipe screen You must synchronize the tags in order to synchronize data between the tags of the recipe screen and the recipe data records displayed in the recipe view The recipe tags are always automatically synchronized on the TP 177A Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 5 Recipe Values in the HMI Device and the PLC 10 5 Recipe Values in the HMI Device and the PLC Introduction You can change the values of a recipe on the HMI device and therefore influence the manufacturing process or a machine Depending on the configuration the recipe values are displayed edited and saved in different ways e If you are editing recipes with a recipe view in your project the values are saved in recipe data records e Ifyou are editing recipes in a recipe screen in your project the values are saved in recipe tags Differences may occur between the display values in the recipe view and the values saved in the associated tags in an ongoing project when you edit recipes with a recipe view and ina recipe s
83. record is deleted Overview Page 308 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 7 Operating the Simple Recipe View 10 7 5 Reading a Recipe Data Record from the PLC Introduction TP 177A Requirement Procedure Result See also The values of recipe elements are exchanged with the PLC via tags In the current project the values which are also stored in the recipes in the HMI device can be changed directly in the plant This is the case for example if a valve was opened further directly at the plant than is stored in the recipe The values of the tags on the HMI device possibly no longer match the values in the PLC To synchronize the recipe values read the values from the PLC and display them in the recipe view With the TP 177A HMI device the From PLC menu command can also be configured for the data record list In this case you can also select the From PLC menu command in the data record list A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe list contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the element list of the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values from the PLC 3 Open the menu 4 Select the menu command From PLC The values are read from the PLC 5 If you want to save the displayed values in the HMI d
84. required data channel by activating the associated Enable Channel check box in the Channel 1 or Channel 2 group In the Channel 1 group the RS 485 port is configured for the serial data transfer Activate the Enable Channel check box to enable the data channel Deactivate the Enable Channel check box to lock the data channel 2 Configure the automatic transfer Deactivate the Remote Control check box to disable automatic transfer Activate the Remote Control check box to enable automatic transfer A WARNING Unintentional transfer mode Ensure that the configuration PC does not inadvertently switch the HMI device to transfer mode during the open project This could cause unintentional actions to be triggered in the plant 3 Enter the required protocol for Channel 2 Touch the input field A selection list is displayed 4 Touch the Advanced button Applies to the MPI PROFIBUS DP protocol Touch the Advanced button if you wish to switch to the S7 Transfer Settings dialog You can change the settings for MPI PROFIBUS DP there Close the S7 Transfer Settings dialog with OK Applies to the ETHERNET protocol Touch the Advanced button if you wish to switch to the Network Configuration dialog You can change the settings for TCP IP there Close the Network Configuration dialog with after making the changes 5 Close the Transfer Settings dialog and save your entries with to accept the entries To
85. safe place The data from the memory card is now on the HMI device The existing licenses are retained on the HMI device all other files have been deleted TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 107 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 7 Setting the Date and Time Requirement Procedure 108 The Date Time Properties dialog has been opened with the 142 Date Time Properties kod icon Date Time Properties Date Time Current Time DMD F e 00 06 52 O 1 2 3 3 4 6 7 8 Daylight savings time 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 f CCSS 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Time zone Time Date Daylight savings check box Button for applying changes Proceed as follows 1 Select the appropriate time zone for the HMI device from the Time Zone selection list 2 Touch the Apply button to confirm your entry The time of day shown in the Current Time box is adjusted correspondingly to the selected time zone 3 Set the date in the selection field 4 Set the current time of day in the Current Time text box 5 Touch the Apply button to confirm your input The values you have set are now in effect Note The system does not automatically switch between winter and summer time TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Opera
86. system on the TP 177B 4 Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Use the Open Input Panel button to open the screen keyboard 2 If you want to switch between the numerical and alphanumerical screen keyboard press the key 3 If you want to change the position of the screen keyboard use the mouse pointer to select a free space between the keys Move the screen keyboard to the required position and release the mouse pointer once you have reached the required position 4 If you want to save the settings press the Save button 5 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The screen keyboard settings have been modified 6 3 4 2 Setting the character repeat Introduction You can use this function to set the character repeat and associated delay for the screen keyboard Requirement Keyboard Properties Repeat V Enable character repeat 1 Repeat delay Lon Short TO LC A Repeat rate Slow Fast i ee Tap here and hold down a key to test Check box for activating the character repeat Slider control and buttons for the delay time before character repeat Slider control and buttons for the rate of the character repeat Test field OOO TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 147 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Procedure Result 6 3 4 3 Introduction 148
87. the F button on the screen keyboard The existing user name is deleted from the screen keyboard 4 Touch the pa button on the screen keyboard The user name in the User input field is deleted The following dialog appears User Password OK Cancel 5 Touch the OK button Result The user is deleted The User view appears again TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 277 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Procedure Deleting a User in the Advanced User View Proceed as follows 1 Touch the user you want to delete in the User input field of the User view The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed 2 Touch the 8 button on the screen keyboard The existing user name is deleted from the screen keyboard 3 Touch the lt 4 button on the screen keyboard The user name in the User input field is deleted Result The user is deleted 8 2 13 Closing the Project Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Use the corresponding operator control object to close the project Wait for the Loader to open after you closed the project 2 Switch off power to the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 278 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Alarms 9 9 1 Operating Alarms TP 177A 9 1 1 Overview Alarms Alarms indicate events and states on the HMI device which ha
88. the HMI devices under Windows CE You must save the registry settings after installation or uninstallation You can save the following data to the flash memory e Registry Information e Temporary files Restoring the file system of a memory card Requirements 156 If memory cards are used the file system on the memory card may become damaged perhaps due to a power failure The HMI device detects the defective file system on start up or when the memory card is inserted The HMI device can restore the file system automatically or on request You have opened the OP Properties dialog Persistant Storage tab with the OP M icon OP Properties F Display Device Touch del Save actual registry settings to Flash pa System will start with saved registry Save Registry _ settings next time encase Save all Files from temporary memory e g the Program files directory to flash The files will be restored during system startup The Temp directory will not be saved 0 Automatically repair file system errors on storage cards at system startup and card insertion time Saves the current registry information to the flash memory The HMI device loads the saved registry information the next time it boots Button for saving registry information Save Files E Button for saving temporary files OOU OO Saves all the files in temporary storage
89. the KE fee on the screen keyboard The user name in the User input field is deleted 5 Touch the OK button button on the screen keyboard Result The user is deleted TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 243 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A 8 1 5 Procedure 8 1 6 8 1 6 1 Trends Trend View 244 Closing the project Proceed as follows 1 Use the corresponding operator control object to close the project Wait for the Loader to open after you closed the project 2 Switch off power to the HMI device Operating the Trend View Overview Trends continuously display the current process data Trends are displayed in the Trend view A Trend view can display up to four trends simultaneously The figure below shows an example of a Trend view 2 09 09 PM 2 10 49 PM 3 20 2007 3 20 2007 Ruler Trend value in the value table The appearance axes value range and labels of the Trend view can be set by the configuration engineer The configuration engineer can set limits for the trend values A color transition can be configured when the limits are exceeded Additional information on this may be available in your plant documentation TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A Valu
90. the TP 177B 6 Page 52 Interfaces on the OP 177B Page 52 aa TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 64 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device 4 3 10 Connecting USB devices to TP 177B and OP 177B You can connect the following devices to the USB port of the HMI device External mouse External keyboard Printer USB memory stick Industrial USB Hub 4 Industrial USB hub 4 can be obtained using order number 6AV6671 3AHO0 0AX0 Note when connecting NOTICE Functional problem with USB port If you connect an external device with an independent power supply without equipotential bonding to the USB port you may experience functional problems Ensure a non insulated installation Excessive rated load on port A USB device with too high a power load may possibly cause functional problems Observe the values for the maximum load of the USB port You will find the values in the technical specifications See also Specifications Page 325 Interfaces on the TP 177B 4 Page 51 Interfaces on the TP 177B 6 Page 52 Interfaces on the OP 177B Page 52 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 65 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device Connecting printers to TP 177B and OP 177B 4 3 11 Wiring diagram You can connect a printer as a peripheral
91. the connections no power supply 140014 The configured bus address is in already in use by Edit the HMI device address in the controller another application configuration 140015 Wrong transmission rate Correct the relevant parameters Or Faulty bus parameters e g HSA Or OP address gt HSA or Wrong interrupt vector interrupt does not arrive at the driver 140016 The hardware does not support the configured Change the interrupt number interrupt 140017 The set interrupt is in use by another driver Change the interrupt number 140018 The consistency check was disabled by Enable the consistency check with SIMOTION Scout and SIMOTION Scout Only a corresponding note once again download the project to the PLC appears 140019 SIMOTION Scout is downloading a new project to Wait until the end of the reconfiguration the controller Connection to the controller is canceled TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 347 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 140020 The version in the controller and that of the project The following remedies are available FW X file do not match Connection to the controller is canceled Download the current version to the PLC using SIMOTION Scout Regenerate the project using WinCC flexible ES close WinCC flexible Runtime and restart with a new configuration
92. the key Either action closes the screen keyboard e Numerical screen keyboard The alphanumerical keyboard is organized in the following two layers Normal level Shift level e Reduced screen keyboard TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 145 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Changing the display of the screen keyboard Key Function Switching between the numerical and alphanumerical keyboard Switching between the normal level and Shift level of the alphanumerical screen keyboard E a Switching from full display to reduced display i Switching from reduced display to full display zi Closing the reduced display on the screen keyboard x 6 3 4 Changing settings for operation 6 3 4 1 Configuring the screen keyboard Introduction You can set at which screen position and in which view the screen keyboard will open Requirements You have opened the Siemens HMI Input Panel Options dialog with the Currently closed Save current size and position Save Button for displaying the screen keyboard Button for saving the screen keyboard settings TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 146 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating
93. the left for more memory to run programs Move slider to the right for more storage room Only unused RAM can be adjusted Storage Memory Allocated 512KB Allocated 47304KB In Use 80KB In Use 11116KB 1 Determine the HMI device s current memory structure 2 Close the dialog TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 6 11 Activate memory management Memory management Provided the memory management is activated the HMI device will automatically close the project if the memory needs reorganizing during an active project The project is shut down and the HMI device will display a message You have to restart the project NOTICE Memory management If you do not activate memory management undefined states can occur during the runtime of the project Activate the memory management Requirements You have opened the OP Properties dialog Memory Monitoring tab with the OP ie icon OP Properties Maximum used memory 22 pe Current used memory 22 Maximum memory used since the HMI device was last switched on Percentage of memory currently used Activate memory management Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If you want to enable memory management activate the check box If memory management
94. transfer the data Format the memory card on the HMI device back to the memory card You can now transfer the backup data from the memory card to the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operator Controls and Displays 5 2 Connecting a memory card to the TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Procedure Ejecting a Memory Card NOTICE Loss of data possible The data on the memory card is lost if you attempt to remove it while the HMI device is accessing its data Do not remove the memory card while data is being accessed Observe the corresponding alarms on the screen The following figure shows you how to eject the memory card on the example of the TP 177B r i MONI E Re Eject button Proceed as follows 1 Press the ejection button This ejects the memory card out of the slot NOTICE Do not force the ejector This could damage its mechanism 2 Unplug the memory card from the memory card slot 3 Store the memory card in a safe place TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 75 Operator Controls and Displays 5 3 Insert a memory card in the TP 177B 4 5 3 Insert a memory card in the TP 177B 4 Approved memory cards Only use SD memory cards or MultiMediaCards tested and approved by Siemens AG for the respective HMI device NOTICE
95. transferring a project to the HMI device This is caused by different versions of the configuration software used and the HMI device image available on the HMI device If there are different versions the transfer is aborted A message indicating a compatibility conflict is displayed on the configuring PC There are two ways to match the versions e Update the HMI device image if the project was created with the most recent version of the configuration software Transfer a matching older version of the HMI device image if you do not want to adapt the project to the most recent version of the configuration software for the project NOTICE Data loss All data on the HMI device such as the projects and passwords will be deleted when you update the operating system Data channels An operating system update resets all parameters for the data channels The transfer can only be started in the Loader following reconfiguration of the data channels Note Calibrating the touch screen After updating you may have to re calibrate the touch screen TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 4 Updating operating systems on the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 7 4 2 Resetting to factory settings Resetting to factory settings In ProSave or WinCC flexible you can update the operating system with or without resetting to factory settings
96. under Windows CE TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 170 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Within the ETHERNET data network the device name must be unique and satisfy the DNS conventions These include Procedure The device name can consist of maximum 240 characters If the device name is longer than 63 characters it must be classified in the name component Each name component can consist of maximum 63 characters Name components are separated from each other by means of points Example lt Subdomain Name gt lt Domain Name gt lt Top Level Domain Name gt The device name may include characters figures hyphens or points The device name must not start or end with a character The device name must not take the form n n n n n 0 to 999 The device name must not start with the character sequence port xyz x y z 0 to 9 Proceed as follows 1 If you want to enable the PROFINET IO direct keys activate the PROFINET IO enabled check box Enter the device name of the HMI device 3 Confirm your entries Result The dialog closes The PROFINET IO direct keys are enabled TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 171 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4
97. when operating the touch screen In order to prevent any operating errors as a result calibrate the touch screen again in the startup phase or during runtime You have opened the OP Properties dialog box Touch tab by touching the OP ie icon OP Properties Display Device Touch Memory Monitoring TF your Windows CE device is not responding 4 properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start tap Recalibrate Recalibrate n O If the HMI device does not react precisely to a touch the touch screen may require calibration Button for calibrating the touch screen Proceed as follows 1 Click on the Recalibrate button The following dialog opens Carefully press and briefly hold stylus on the center of the target Repeat as the target moves around the screen o Carefully press the center of the calibration crosshairs Repeat this process as long as the calibration crosshair moves on the touch screen Calibration crosshair TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 2 Briefly touch the center of the calibration crosshairs The calibration crosshairs is then displayed at four more positions 3 Briefly touch the middle of the calibration crosshairs for each position Once
98. you have touched all the positions of the calibration crosshairs the following dialog appears New calibration settings have been measured Tap the screen to register saved data Wait for 30 seconds to cancel saved data and keep the current setting Time limit 30 sec O The new calibration values are measured Touch the touch screen to save the calibration values If you do not touch the screen within 30 seconds the new calibration values will be discarded Time remaining until the calibration values are discarded 4 Touch the touch screen The calibration is saved The OP Properties dialog box Touch tab is displayed again If you do not touch the touch screen within the time shown your original setting will be retained 5 Close the dialog Result The HMI device touch screen is calibrated 6 3 5 Changing password protection Introduction You can protect access to the Control Panel and the Windows CE taskbar with a password When you set up the password protection the SecureMode is activated automatically For more information refer to SecureMode in section Setting up and disabling SecureMode Page 140 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 151 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Requirements g You have opened the Password Properties dialog with the Password
99. 006 The threshold values configured for the tag have been violated by values entered Observe the configured or current threshold values of the tag 290007 There is a difference between the source and target structure of the recipe currently being processed The target structure contains an additional data recipe tag which is not available in the source structure The data recipe tag specified is assigned its start value Insert the specified data recipe tag in the source structure 290008 There is a difference between the source and target structure of the recipe currently being processed The source structure contains an additional data recipe tag which is not available in the target structure and therefore cannot be assigned The value is rejected Remove the specified data recipe tag in the specified recipe from the project 290010 The storage location configured for the recipe is not permitted Possible causes Illegal characters write protection data carrier out of space or does not exist Check the configured storage location 290011 The data record with the specified number does not exist Check the source for the number constant or tag value 290012 The recipe with the specified number does not exist Check the source for the number constant or tag value 290013 An attempt was made to save a data record under a data record number which already exists Th
100. 08 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 333 Specitications 12 8 Description of the Interfaces TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 334 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 1 ESD Guidelines What does ESD mean All electronic modules are equipped with highly integrated modules or components Based on their design these electronic components are highly sensitive to overvoltage and thus to discharge of static electricity These electronic components are therefore specially identified as ESD Abbreviations The following abbreviations are commonly used for electrostatic sensitive devices e ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Devices e ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Device as common international designation Labeling ESD modules are labeled with the following symbol TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 335 Appendix A 7 ESD Guidelines Electrostatic charge 336 CAUTION Electrostatic charge ESDs may be destroyed by voltages well below the perception threshold of persons Voltages of this kind develop when a component or an assembly is touched by a person who is not grounded against static electricity Usually it is unlikely that damage to an ESD as a result of overvoltage is detected immediately but may become apparent only after a longer period of operation Prevent electrostatic charge of your body before you touch the ESD
101. 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 2 Structure of a recipe Recipe data records Elements The drawers of the file cabinet are filled with suspension folders The suspension folders in the drawers represent records required for manufacturing various product variants Example Product variants of the flavor apple might be a soft drink a juice or nectar for example Drawer Recipe Product variants of apple flavored drinks Suspension folder Recipe data record Apple drink Suspension folder Recipe data record Apple nectar Suspension folder Recipe datarecord Apple juice OO In the figure showing the file cabinet each suspension folder contains the same number of sheets Each sheet in the suspension folder corresponds to an element of the recipe data record All the records of a recipe contain the same elements The records differ however in the value of the individual elements Example All drinks contain the same components water concentrate sugar and flavoring The records for soft drink fruit juice or nectar differ however in the quantity of sugar used in production TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 293 Operating Recipes 10 3 Recipes in the Project 10 3 Recipes in the Project Overview If recipes are used in a project the following components interact 294 HMI device recipe memory Recipes are saved in the form of data records in the
102. 170004 An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized The system returns an internal error of error class 2 error number 3 170007 It is not possible to read the S7 diagnostics buffer SSL because this operation was canceled with an internal error of class 2 and error code 3 180000 Acomponent OCxX received configuration data with Install a newer component a version ID which is not supported 180001 System overload because too many actions Several remedies are available running in parallel Not all the actions can be e Increase the configured cycle times or basic clock executed some are rejected e Generate the alarms at a slower rate polling e Initiate scripts and functions at greater intervals If the alarm appears more frequently Restart the HMI device 180002 The on screen keyboard could not be activated Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime Possible causes TouchInputPC exe was not registered due to a faulty Setup 190000 It is possible that the tag is not updated 190001 The tag is updated after the cause of the last error state has been eliminated return to normal operation 190002 The tag is not updated because communication Select the system function SetOnline to go online with the controller is down 190004 The tag is not updated because the configured tag Check the configuration address does not exist 190005 The tag is not upda
103. 2 Using the memory card Touch the BACKUP button The message Storage card detected is displayed A warning is displayed if the available space is insufficient The backup is aborted Delete any unneeded data on the memory card using the Windows CE Explorer Ifthe memory card contains data the following message is displayed You have an old backup on the storage card Do you want to delete it Press Yes if you want to delete the data Press No if you want to retain the data The messages Checking the registry settings and Saving CE image are displayed in sequence when the backup begins A progress bar shows the status of the process The backup ends with the following message Backup successfully completed Touch OK and remove memory card Touch the OK button The Control Panel is displayed The HMI device data is now saved on the memory card Procedure for restoring Proceed as follows 106 1 Touch the RESTORE button The message Restore started is displayed The following message appears if no memory card is inserted in the card slot or if the memory card is damaged ABORT RESTORE Storage card couldn t be dectected Try restore again Insert storage card and press OK or abort restore with CANCEL Then perform steps 2 and 4 Touch OR This message is displayed Restore aborted Remove the memory card 3 Remove the memory card 4 Confirm with OK
104. 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 110002 The operating mode was not changed Check the connection to the controllers Check if the address area for the area pointer 88 Coordination in the controller is available 110003 The operating mode of the specified controller was changed by the system function SetConnectionMode The operating mode is now offline 110004 The operating mode of the specified controller has been changed by the system function SetConnectionMode The operating mode is now online 110005 An attempt was made to use the system function Switch the complete system to online mode then SetConnectionMode to switch the specified execute the system function again controller to online mode although the entire system is in offline mode This changeover is not allowed The controller remains in offline mode 110006 The content of the project version area pointer Check does not match the user version configured in e the project version entered on the controller MASS Nexible Win G He xible Runtime i e the project version entered in WinCC flexible therefore closed 120000 The trend is not displayed because you configured Change the configuration an incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend 120001 The trend is not displayed because you configured Change the configuration an incorrect axis to the trend or an incor
105. 238 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A Backup and Restore The users passwords group assignments and logoff times set up on the HMI device can be backed up and restored This prevents you having to enter all of the data again on another HMI device NOTICE During a restore the currently valid user data is overwritten The restored user data and passwords are valid immediately Limits for User Password and User View Number of characters Length of user name maximum 40 Length of password minimum 3 Length of password maximum 24 Entries in user view maximum 50 8 1 4 2 User logon Requirements Use the logon dialog to log into the security system of the HMI device Enter user name and password in the logon dialog You have the following options for displaying the logon dialog e Touch the operator control object with password protection e Touch an operator control object that was configured for displaying the logon dialog e Double click on the lt ENTER gt entry in the User view e At the beginning of the project the logon dialog will be automatically displayed in certain circumstances Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 239 Operating a Project
106. 3 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 5 3 Entering alphanumerical values on the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Alphanumerical screen keyboard When you touch an operating element for numerical input on the HMI device touch screen the alphanumerical screen keyboard appears This is the case for example for an input field or a date time field The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete The figure below shows the normal level of the alphanumerical screen keyboard _ ej cfol jefe oa gt ia ad Es SEEE i Fd Pi Us SEAS Note Opened screen keyboard When the screen keyboard is open PLC job 51 Select screen has no function Language change Language change in the project has no influence on the alphanumerical screen keyboard The entry of Cyrillic or Asian characters is therefore not possible Keyboard levels The alphanumerical screen keyboard has various levels e Normal level e Shift level If you change the levels with key Shift the key assignments change TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 254 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project Procedure 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Alphanumerical values can be entered character by character via the buttons on the alphanumerical screen keyboard Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired operating element within the screen The
107. 308 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 7 Operating the Simple Recipe View Shortcut menus of the simple recipe view A shortcut menu can be called for each display area The commands available in the shortcut menu depend on the currently selected display area A number is assigned to each command The command is executed when you enter the number of the command e Recipe list Menu command Function New A new recipe data record is created for the selected recipe If a start value is configured it is shown in the input field Display infotext The infotext configured for the simple recipe view is displayed Open The record list of the selected recipe opens e Record list Menu command Function New Creates a new recipe data record If a start value is configured it is shown in the input field Delete The selected recipe data record is deleted Save as The selected recipe data record is saved under another name A dialog box opens in which the name is entered Rename The selected recipe data record is renamed A dialog box opens in which the name is entered Opening The element list of the selected recipe data record opens Back The recipe list opens With the TP 177A HMI device the following menu commands can also be configured for the record list To PLC The d
108. 6 3 10 Changing transfer settings 6 3 10 1 Configuring the data channel Introduction Requirements 172 If you block all data channels the HMI device is protected against unintentional overwriting of the project data and HMI device image Note A project can only be transferred from the configuring PC to the HMI device when at least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device The Transfer Settings dialog Channel tab has been opened with the Transfer Settings 1 3 icon Transfer Settings f Channel Directories Channel 1 E T Serial via RS232 PPI Multi Master Cable C Enable Channel oO Remote Control Channel 2 _ _ _ _ _ 2 ETHERNET v Enable Channel Remote Control advanced Group for the data channel 1 Channel 1 Group for the data channel 2 Channel 2 Button for the S7 Transfer Settings and or Network and Dial Up Connections dialog TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 A WARNING Unintentional transfer mode Unintentional transfer mode could cause unintentional actions to be triggered in the plant Ensure that the configuring PC does not inadvertently switch the HMI device to transfer mode during the open project NOTICE Remote contro
109. 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 If you want to restart the HMI device press the Reboot button The following message is displayed TF you execute this Function you lose all unsaved Files Please close all applications before rebooting Press Prepare For Reset to download the OS and reset to factory settings Reboot Prepare for Reset If you run this function all data which has not been backed up will be lost Please close all applications before restarting Button for resetting factory settings and subsequent restart Button for the restart Click on one of the buttons If you want to restart the HMI device press the Reboot button The HMI device restarts without delay If you want to reset the HMI device to factory settings and then perform a restart press the Prepare for Reset button You are given the option to reset the HMI device via ProSave to factory settings Then restart the HMI device If you want do not want to restart the HMI device press the No button The message ends There will be no restart The HMI device starts TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 163 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 6 8 Displaying information about the HMI device Introduction Requirements 164 You will need the device specific informa
110. 7 2 3 Starting Automatic Transfer Introduction Requirements 200 The HMI device can be automatically switched to Transfer mode during runtime as soon as transfer is started on the configuring PC connected Automatic transfer is particularly suited for the test phase of a new project since transfer is completed without interfering with the HMI device Automatic transfer is available for the following data channels HMI device Serial MPI PROFIBUS DP USB PROFINET TP 177A No Yes TP 177B OP 177B Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTICE If the automatic transfer has been activated on the HMI device and a transfer is initiated on the configuring PC the project currently running is automatically stopped The HMI device then automatically switches to Transfer mode After the commissioning phase deactivate the automatic transfer so that the HMI device cannot be inadvertently switched to transfer mode The transfer mode can trigger unintentional actions in the device You can set a password for the Loader of the HMI device to restrict access to the transfer settings and thus avoid unauthorized modifications e The project hmi is opened in WinCC flexible e The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC e The data channel is configured on the HMI device e The automatic transfer is activated in the data channel for the transfer e The project is started on the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B Wi
111. 77A Page 51 Interfaces on the TP 177B 4 Page 51 Interfaces on the TP 177B 6 Page 52 Interfaces on the OP 177B Page 52 4 3 9 Connecting a configuration PC Wiring diagram The figure below illustrates the connection between the HMI device and the configuration PC You can use this connection to transfer the image the project and further project data TP 177A TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 61 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device CH Ht OP 177B TP 177B 6 TP 177B 4 ozo Use a cross cable for the Ethernet connection of the TP 177B 6 and the OP 177B when using a point to point connection You can use a standard cable for the Ethernet connection of the TP 177B 4 as this HMI device has an automatic cross over function The interfaces are described in the technical specifications For RS 485 RS 232 conversion you can order the PC PPI cable from Siemens AG using order number 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 62 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 nstallation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device Configuring a PC PPI cable Use the DIP switches to configure the transfer rate of the PC PPI cable Note If the connection fails during the operating system update set the system to
112. 77B WinCC flexible 222 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 6 Installing and Removing Options 7 6 3 Installing and removing options using ProSave Requirements The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed The data channel is configured on the HMI device Procedure for installing an option Proceed as follows NO oO FR WY Result From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC Select the HMI device type in the General tab Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC Set the connection parameters Select the Options tab Select the desired option under Available options Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when the installation of an option is initiated Start the installation of the option in ProSave with the gt gt button Follow the instructions in ProSave A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation The option has now been installed on the HMI device Procedure for removing an option Proceed as follows ON DOO FW DY From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC Select the HMI device type in the General tab Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC Set the connection parameters Select the Options tab
113. 77B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Planning Use 3 2 Mounting Positions and Fixation 3 2 Mounting Positions and Fixation Mounting position The HMI device is designed for mounting in racks cabinets control boards and consoles In the following all of these mounting options are referred to by the general term cabinet The HMI device is self ventilated and approved for vertical and inclined mounting in stationary cabinets Mounting position Deviation from the vertical _ Inclined lt 35 Vertical 0 Inclined lt 35 CAUTION Impermissible ambient temperatures Do not operate the HMI device without auxiliary ventilation if the maximum permissible ambient temperature is exceeded The HMI device may otherwise get damaged and its certifications and warranty will be void TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 41 Planning Use 3 2 Mounting Positions and Fixation Horizontal mounting for TP 177A TP 177B and OP 177B When mounted horizontally the cable inlets are located at the bottom Vertical mounting for TP 177A When mounted vertically the cable inlets are located on the right TOUCH F g 3 D Securing the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Plastic mounting clamps are provided for mounting the device The mounting clamps hoo
114. 96 6 2 1 OW GIMIGWE pce a ects an aaepe Ea tales aa Sadia as ean da shelton that ak aaea eA 96 6 2 2 CONMOl PANS E E E L abt agetodeaneusnedeeeidentecns 98 6 2 2 1 OVEN erreen an ens Qeaeed sereek ay pee nate eh ate eae aenee aa ae ae 98 6 2 2 2 Input Using the Screen Keyboard ecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeseeeeeeseneaeeesenaeeseenaeeaaeess 100 6 2 2 3 Configuring the Screen Keyboafdasssensssransninann 101 6 2 2 4 Setting the Character Repeat for the Screen Keyboard cccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeecenneeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeeaas 6 2 2 5 Setting the Double click on the TOUCH SCree N cceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeenaeeeseeaeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeeeaaes 6 2 2 6 Backup and Restore Using a Memory Card 0 ceccceceeeteceeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaes 6 2 2 7 Setting the Date and Time vc ccsccccecceceseccesvesseeccesvceeeeesnendecatenscccstsaccetansdecateadecctenaeceateaeeesneeananees 6 2 2 8 Saving Registry Normalan sssaaa a A A AANA A AT EAAS 109 6 2 2 9 Changing Screen Contrast ecceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseceeeeseeeeeeeseceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeenaeees 6 2 2 10 Displaying Information about the HMI DeVICE ec eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeaeeeteeaeeeeee 6 2 2 11 Calibrating the Touch Screen sorron aA 6 2 2 12 Changing the Password Settings ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeesenaeenaeees 6 2 2 13 Changing Printer SCUINGS niv vcccecsnsti
115. A 8 1 3 Entries and Help within a Project 8 1 3 1 Overview Procedure Values are entered in the project input fields The values are transferred from the input fields to the PLC Proceed as follows 1 Touch the input field required on the screen The screen keyboard opens Based on your configuration you can enter the following type of values in the input field Numerical Alphanumerical Symbolic Date time 2 Set the value 3 Confirm the entry Screen keyboard When you touch an input object such as an IO field on the HMI touch screen a screen keyboard appears This screen keyboard is also displayed when it is necessary to enter a password to access protected functions The keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete Based on the configuration of the input object the system opens a screen keyboard for entering numerical alphanumerical or symbolic values Note The screen keyboard display is independent of the configured project language Numerical values You can enter numerical values character by character using the numerical screen keyboard Formats for Numerical Values You can enter values in numerical input fields based on the following formats e Decimal e Hexadecimal e Binary TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 230 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A Limit Value Test of Nume
116. A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 157 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 6 5 Setting the screen saver Introduction You can activate a screen saver for the HMI device You can also set the HMI device so that the backlighting of the screen is reduced if it is not used for a while This has the following advantages e The service life of the screen LEDs is extended e The HMI device uses less power You can set the following time intervals on the HMI device e For the automatic activation of the screen saver e For the automatic reduction in the screen s backlighting When you do not undertake an operation within the configured interval the configured function will be activated automatically The screen saver and the reduced screen backlighting functions are switched back off by means of the following actions e By pressing any key e By touching the touch screen The function associated to the key or button will not be executed by this NOTICE Reduce backlighting The brightness of the backlighting decreases incrementally during its operational life In order to not shorten the operational lifetime of the backlighting unnecessarily activate the backlighting reduction Activating the screen saver Screen contents which remain unchanged for long periods can remain dimly visible in the background This eff
117. B OP 177B WinCC flexible 354 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 260000 An unknown user or an unknown password has Log on to the system as a user with a valid password been entered in the system The current user is logged off from the system 260001 The logged in user does not have sufficient Log on to the system as a user with sufficient authorization to execute the protected functions on authorization the system 260002 This alarm is triggered by the system function TrackUserChange 260003 The user has logged off from the system 260004 The user name entered into the user view already Select another user name because user names have to exists in the user management be unique in the user management 260005 The entry is discarded Use a shorter user name 260006 The entry is discarded Use a shorter or longer password 260007 The logon timeout value entered is outside the valid Enter a logon timeout value between 0 and 60 minutes range of 0 to 60 minutes The new value is discarded and the original value is retained 260008 An attempt was made to read a PTProRun pwil file created with ProTool V 6 0 in WinCC flexible Reading the file was canceled due to incompatibility of the format 260009 You have attempted to delete the user Admin or If you need to delete
118. B 4 6 3 6 7 Introduction Essential restart Requirement 162 Restarting the HMI device You can restart the HMI device or reset it to factory settings prior to the restart For more information refer to the section Resetting factory settings Page 213 The HMI device must be restarted in the following cases e You have activated or deactivated the PROFINET IO direct keys e You have changed the time zone setting e You have changed the automatic daylight savings and standard setting NOTICE Data loss when the HMI device is restarted All volatile data is lost when the HMI device is rebooted Check the following e The project on the HMI device is complete e No data is being written to the flash memory The HMI device must be restarted in the following cases Lh shaatin mi ETI arrasa ox x OP Properties Persistent Storage Display f Device foc Device TP 1776 4 color PN DP Image Version 01 00 00 00_01 47 Bootloader Version 0 90 Bootloader Rel Date 29 2 2008 Flashsize 32 MB MAC Address 08 00 06 29 da 00 Reboot a Button for restarting the HMI device If you wish to start the HMI device by resetting to factory settings The HMI device is connected via PROFINET to a configuration PC TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System Procedure Result 1
119. Coordination is not carried out at the moment because the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format Internal error 200103 Coordination can be executed again because the last error state is eliminated return to normal operation 200104 The coordination may not be executed 200105 No more data is read or written Possible causes e The cable is defective e The PLC does not respond is defective etc e System overload Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the controller is operational Restart the system if the system alarm persists 210000 Jobs are not processed because the address configured in the controller does not exist has not been set up Change the address or set up the address in the controller 210001 Jobs are not processed because read write access to the address configured in the controller is not possible Change the address or set up the address in the controller in an area which allows read write access 210002 Jobs are not executed because the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format Internal error 210003 The job buffer is processed again because the last error status has been eliminated return to normal operation 210004 It is possible that the job buffer will not be processed 210005 A control request with an illegal number was initiated Check the controller
120. Device Page 68 Configuring the Data Channel Page 126 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 97 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 Control Panel 6 2 2 1 Overview Control Panel of the HMI Device The settings you can make in the Control Panel of the HMI device include Communication Date time Screen saver Backup and restore Regional settings Transfer settings Delay time Password Opening the Control Panel Touch the Control Panel button in the Loader to open the HMI device Control Panel The following options are available to open the Loader 98 The Loader appears briefly after starting the HMI device Closing a Project If configured touch the relevant operator control object to stop the project The Loader opens Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic T OG gE vf Communic Date Time InputPanel gt 4 amp Keyboard Mouse Network OP 4 A iE Password Printer Regional S Transfer Settings Settings 5 ScreenSaver System Transfer Wincc Internet Settings v TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System Procedure Backup Restore Communication Properties Date Time InputPanel Keyboard
121. HL 2700 printers Color printing check box V lt OHOOLHO Print quality check box TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System Procedure Result 6 3 Contiguring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Proceed as follows Select a printer from the Printer Language selection list Select the port for the printer from the Port selection list If you wish to print via the network enter the printer s network address in the Network text box Select a paper format in the Paper Size selection list Activate a radio button in the Orientation group Portrait for portrait Landscape for landscape Select the print quality Select the Draft Mode check box if you wish to print in draft mode Deactivate the Draft Mode check box if you wish to print with higher quality If the printer selected can print in color and you wish it to do so select the Color check box If you use the Brother HL 2700 printer model enable the CMY check box In this way you can increase the color quality when printing Confirm your entries The dialog closes The settings for the printer have now been changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 161 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177
122. HMI device Input on the HMI device Using function keys 248 248 Using operator Sai 22 227 246 Input Panel Input unit TP 177B 6 Installing Option 2 cere Security Working on the control cabinet 29 Interface Rated load 65 Interfaces 5 Configuring 6 Rated load TP 177B 4 Interference Pulse shaped 37 Sinusoidal 37 Internal clock 154 Internet Settings has heg Internet settings 136 IP address 181 Keyboard External 1 Keyboard A es 103 142 374 L Labeling Certifications EC Declaration of Conformity 30 Function keys Labeling strips Dimensions Printing LAN connection 143 Language De 229 250 F PROFINET interface License information 89 License key 224 Transferring 225 Transferring i Limit value test 2 Limit values For password 2 For user 239 For user view 239 Limits For password For user For user view th Logoff time 269 Logon Users 239 271 Logon data in the TCP IP network M MAC address 133 170 ara Maintenance Manual Transfer Mechanical Shipping conditions Storage conditions TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Index Memory card Backup to Ejecting First use Inserting 74 removing 77 Restoring file system 156 Restoring from 105 Memory information Displaying Memory management 143 Monitoring mode Sm
123. I device is in Online mode TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 3 Backup and Restore Procedure In Online mode you can test individual project functions on the HMI device without them being affected by the PLC PLC tags are updated in this case You have the option to test all communication dependent functions for example alarms etc Test the operating elements and views of the project See also Setting the Operating Mode Page 195 7 3 Backup and Restore 7 3 1 Overview Backup and restoring You can back up and restore the following data found in the internal flash memory of the HMI device with a PC e Project and HMI device image e User administration e Recipe data e License keys Use one of the following tools for backup and restoring e WinCC flexible e ProSave General information NOTICE Power failure If a complete restore operation is interrupted due to power failure on the HMI device the operating system of the HMI device may be deleted In this case you have to reset the HMI device to its factory settings Compatibility conflict If a message is output on the HMI device warning of a compatibility conflict during the restore operation the operating system must be updated TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 203 Commissioning a proje
124. Introduction You can delete all the data records of a recipe which are not required Requirements A screen with a recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the recipe data record you want to delete 3 Touch x Result The recipe data record is deleted See also Overview Recipes in the Project Page 294 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 304 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View 10 6 5 Synchronizing Tags on the TP 177B and OP 177B Introduction Requirement Procedure Result See also The values of the recipe elements can be saved to recipe tags depending on the configuration Differences may occur between the display values in the recipe view and the actual values of tags in an ongoing project Synchronize the tags to equalize such differences Synchronization always includes all the variables which belong to a recipe data record NOTICE Changed tag name Tags and the value of the recipe data record cannot be assigned to each other if the tag name of the tag to be synchronized has been changed The tags in question are not synchronized Note Recipe tags can only be synchronized in the enhanced recipe view A screen with a recipe view is displayed Proceed as fol
125. MI device Button for restarting the HMI device PG QHMOOHO 2 The device specific information is displayed in the Device tab You will need this information if you contact A amp D Technical Support 3 Activate the Reboot button if you want to reboot the HMI device After you have activated the Reboot button a warning is displayed on the screen If you acknowledge this with OK the HMI device is rebooted immediately 4 Use Kj or X to close the dialog when the information is no longer required caution Data loss when the HMI device is restarted All volatile data is lost when the HMI device is rebooted No check is carried out as to whether or not the project on the HMI device is running the communication is active whether or not data are currently being written into the flash memory Note The size of the internal flash memory does not correspond to the available working memory for a project TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 112 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 11 Calibrating the Touch Screen Introduction Depending on the mounting position and viewing angle it is possible that parallax may occur when operating the HMI device In order to prevent any operating errors as a result calibrate the touch screen again in the startup phase or during runtime
126. Mounting clamps TP 177B 4 The recesses required to suspend the metal mounting clamps are marked with an arrow on the back of the HMI device Marking for position of a mounting clamp To ensure one of the degrees of protection IP65 or NEMA 4 suspend the metal mounting clamps in the marked recesses In each case use one metal mounting for the right left and bottom and two at the top Mounting clamps on the OP 177B If IP65 or NEMA 4 degrees of protection are required for the OP 177B the mounting clamps must be installed as follows Additionally required plastic mounting clamps for IP65 and NEMA 4 degrees of protection TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 48 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Installation and connection Mounting 4 2 Mounting the HMI Device NOTICE Always mount the HMI device according to the instructions in this manual Risk of guaranteed level of protection not being met If the mounting seal is damaged or protrudes beyond the HMI device the level of protection is not ensured Check the fit of the mounting seal Note Tighten the set screw or the cross tip screw of the mounting clamps until the HMI device is flush with the surface of the control cabinet As an alternative you can tighten the mounting clamps using the following torque e Plastic mounting clamps max 0 15 Nm e Metal mounting clamps max 0 2 Nm Proceed as follows 1 Chec
127. OK Cancel 2 Enter the desired user information Touch the corresponding input field The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed The password may not contain space characters or the special characters 3 Touch the OK button The following dialog appears MM x Group Group 1 Logoff time g cancel 4 Enter the desired user information Touch the corresponding input field The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed For the logoff time you can use values of 0 to 60 minutes The value 0 stands for no automatic logoff 5 Touch the OK button Result The new user is created TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 273 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Procedure Creating a User in the Advanced User View Proceed as follows Enter the required user information on the empty lines of the User view Touch the corresponding input field The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed e The password may not contain space characters or the special characters e For the logoff time you can use values of 0 to 60 minutes The value 0 stands for no automatic logoff Result The new user is created 8 2 12 5 Changing User Data Requirements Change user data in the user view To display the user view switch to the screen that contains the user view The following optio
128. OK button Result The user data for the user is changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 275 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Procedure Changing User Data in the Advanced User View This procedure describes changing user data by the administrator or a user with user management permission Proceed as follows 1 Inthe user view touch the user whose user data you want to change User Password Group Logoff time Admin HARA Croup 9 The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed 2 Change the desired user data Result The user data for the user is changed 8 2 12 6 Deleting a User Requirements You delete users in the user view To display the user view switch to the screen that contains the user view To delete a user you must have user management permission Note The Admin and PLC_User users exist by default and cannot be deleted TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 276 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Procedure Deleting a User in the Simple User View 1 Touch the user that you want to delete in the User view The following dialog appears User User 1 Password BEEE OK Cancel 2 Touch the User input field The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed 3 Touch
129. OX E E E E ecendeusdevecg vexsvescwenvieyedeuddenewevs aeciecccousuessocsegecveuevacceecdusesavsabdvvussecliescsvexsvaaensences TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Overview 1 1 1 Product Overview Advanced applications with the Touch Panels TP 177A TP 177B and OP 177B The 177 series of panels represents a further advance in the development of the well known 170 HMI devices The new TP 177A TP 177B and OP 177B panels make for more efficient use of text or graphic based projects for simple to medium level HMI operating and monitoring tasks in machines and plants Projects with Asian and Cyrillic character sets can be configured as usual The ability to vertically mount the TP 177A and the non volatile alarm buffer of the TP 177B offer new application possibilities In addition the TP 177B and OP 177B depending on the models provide interfaces for connecting to PROFIBUS and PROFINET The TP 177B 4 features a 4 3 TFT display with wide screen format This display extends the visible area on the HMI device by approximately 25 compared to similar displays with 4 3 format The HMI device also features four function keys with tactile feedback In combination with the intuitive touch operation it offers maximum operating efficiency In addition to MMC cards the TP 177B 4 supports SD cards and USB memory sticks OP 177B offers an additional feature It can now be operated u
130. P 177B and OP 177B Overview Using Operator Controls on the Touch Screen Operator controls are touch sensitive objects on the HMI screen such as buttons I O fields and alarm windows Touch objects are basically operated in the same way as mechanical keys You activate operator controls by touching them with your finger Some operations with the project may require in depth knowledge about the specific plant on the part of the operator It is therefore important to take special care for example in displaying typing Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation caution Always touch only one operator control on the screen Never touch more than one operator control at a time otherwise you may trigger unintentional actions CAUTION Do not use any pointed or sharp objects when operating the touch screen as this may damage the plastic membrane of the touch screen Locking operator controls 246 The HMI provides optical feedback when it detects that an operator control has been touched This feedback is independent of any communication with the PLC Therefore this feedback does not indicate whether the relevant action is actually executed or not The configuration engineer may also have configured the feedback function in a different manner Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructio
131. Requirement The OP Properties dialog has been opened with the OP ie icon Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Open the OP Properties dialog then select the Touch tab If your Windows CE device is not responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen 1 To start tap Recalibrate Recalibrate If the HMI device does not react precisely to a touch the touch screen may require calibration Button for calibrating the touch screen 2 Touch the Recalibrate button The following dialog appears Carefully press and briefly hold stylus on the center of the target Repeat as the target moves around the screen Carefully press the middle of the calibration crosshairs Repeat the process as long as the calibration crosshairs move on the touch screen Calibration crosshair TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 113 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 3 Briefly touch the calibration crosshairs The calibration crosshairs then goes to four more positions Touch the middle of the calibration crosshairs for each position If you do not touch the middle of the calibration crosshairs the procedure is repeated Once you have touched the calibration crosshairs for all positions the following dialog appears New calibrat
132. Restart the system 140005 No tag updating or writing is executed because the Use a different HMI device address HMI device address is incorrect possibly too high Verify the connection and check ifthe controller is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PG PC interface Restart the system 140006 No tag updating or writing is executed because the Select a different baud rate in WinCC flexible baud rate is incorrect according to module profile communication peer etc 140007 Tag are not updated or written because the bus Check the user defined bus profile profile is incorrect see 1 Check the connection and if the controller is switched on The following parameter could not be written to the Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel registry using Set PG PC interface 1 Tslot Restart the system 2 Tqui 3 Tset 4 MinTsdr 5 MaxTsdr 6 Trdy 7 Tid1 8 Tid2 9 Gap Factor 10 Retry Limit TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 346 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 140008 No tag updating or writing is executed because Check the connection and if the controller is switched on baud rate is incorrect The following parameters Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel could not be written to the registry using Set PG PC interface
133. SIEMENS SIMATIC HMI HMI Device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions Order no 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB 1 08 2008 A5E01006556 03 Preface ii Overview 02 v 2 lt 5 a c Q ie n o J a General Notes 5 U a D Pana J 5 gt cr 5 G N gt D 2 O J J D Q a f Se Operator Controls and 5 Displays Configuring the Operating 6 System O O O xe lo oO oO 3 pe ca co Qn gt o S i U 5 3 g 8 o D Q a Q co CO N 2x O O So D 5 o J oe Recipes D m r D o J e 0 o m a Q O o A gt NO 07 io Q E 9 O 7 Appendix l Abbreviations Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken A WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION with a safety alert symbol indic
134. SIMATIC C7 and SIMATIC WinAC controllers STEP 7 Micro WIN Programming software for controllers of the SIMATIC S7 200 series Symbolic IO field Box for the input output of a parameter Contains a list of default entries from which one can be selected System alarms Assigned to the System alarm class A system alarm refers to internal states on the HMI device and the controller Tab order In the configuration this sets the sequence in which objects are focused on pressing the lt TAB gt key TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 369 Glossary Tag Defined memory location to which values can be written to and read from This can be done from the controller or the HMI device Based on whether the tag is interconnected with the controller or not we distinguish between external tags process tags and internal tags Transfer The transfer of an executable project to the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 370 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Index A Accessories Accessory kit Accessory kit 22 Acknowledging Alarm Error alarm 282 Address assignment in the TCP IP network LAN network Addressing 8 Admin 242 Alarm 2 Alarm indicator Alarm line Alarm text window 281 Alarm view 280 285 Alarm window 280 285 Alarms Displaying 2 Alphanumerical screen keyboard 233 254 Alphanumerical
135. Set the following in the selection lists The character for the decimal separator The character for the thousand separator The separator character for number sequences 3 Touch the respective selection list and set the desired value using the screen keyboard TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Procedure Changing the Time Format 1 Open the Time tab 2 Set the following in the selection lists Time of day format Define the separator between hours minutes and seconds The format for the time before 12 00 noon The format for the time after 12 00 noon 3 Touch the respective selection list and set the desired value using the screen keyboard Procedure Changing the Date Format 1 Open the Date tab 2 Set the following in the selection lists Define the separator between year month and day The abbreviated format of the date The full format of the date 3 Touch the respective selection list and set the desired value using the screen keyboard Procedure Closing the Dialog 1 Close the dialog and save your entries with OK Touch x to discard the entries Result The regional settings for the HMI device screen have now been changed 6 2 2 15 Changing MPI PROFIBUS DP Settings Requirement The S7 Transfer Settings dialog has been
136. System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 6 Backup and Restore Using a Memory Card Introduction A backup involves copying the operating system applications and data in flash memory of the HMI device to a memory card A restore operation deletes all old data from flash memory of the HMI device on confirmation The data stored on the memory card is then copied to the internal flash memory Requirement A memory card with 216 MB capacity is inserted in the HMI device The Backup Restore dialog has been opened with the Backup Restore o icon Backup Restore OK Backup to memory card BACKUP Restore from memory card RESTORE Button for data backup Button for data restore Procedure for backup Proceed as follows 1 Touch the BACKUP button The message Starting backup is displayed The following message appears if no memory card is inserted in the card slot or if the memory card is damaged N No storage card detected Then perform steps 2 and 3 2 Touch OK This message is displayed Backup aborted 3 Confirm with OK The Control Panel is displayed again TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 105 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Result Repeat the procedure with a suitable memory card 1
137. The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 120 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 5 Select the highest station address on the bus in the Highest Station Address input field Touch the input field The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed 6 Select the desired profile from the Profile selection field Touch the input field The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed 7 The profile data is displayed when you press the Bus Parameters button in the PROFIBUS dialog This dialog is read only Trdy Min Tsar i Tidi 76 tBit Max Tsdr i Tid2 800 tBit Tset Tqui Gap factor Retry limit Press the button OK or x to close the dialog 8 Close the dialog and save your entries with OK Touch K to discard the entries NOTICE Address in the MPI PROFIBUS DP network The value specified in the Address input field should be used in an MPI PROFIBUS DP network just once Bus parameters in the MPI PROFIBUS DP network The bus parameters must be the same for all stations in the MPI PROFIBUS DP network Note When a project is opened the MPI DP settings are overwritten with the values from the project TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 121 Configuring the Oper
138. a icon Password Properties OK Password Settings A J in A Password Password Confirm password NOTICE Password not available If the password is no longer available you can execute the following once you have first reset the computer to factory settings e Change settings in the Control Panel e Use the Windows CE taskbar All data on the HMI device will be deleted when you update the operating system Therefore use the password to protect against loss Procedure setting up password protection Result 152 Note The following characters cannot be used in passwords e Blank e Special characters Proceed as follows 1 Enter a password in the Password text box 2 Repeat the password entry in the Confirm password text box 3 Confirm your entries The dialog closes You cannot open the Control Panel or Windows CE taskbar without entering a password TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Procedure disabling password protection Proceed as follows 1 Delete the entries in the Password and Confirm password input fields 2 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result Password protection for the Control Panel and the Windows CE taskbar is disabled There is free access to these applications
139. a cas a aa eRe O T E a a a S EE 2 6 8 2 13 Closing the ProjeCteerssisniniserieie poinent innin nEaN E A E A EEEE EE 2 9 Operating ALANS cienen aon p n e E Naa aE OE para E E 279 9 1 Operating Alarms TP 177A scented gaat phunase dove eteridatdes atin epin adcbielaadiutetatieel 279 9 1 1 OVET VIEW iss cele el Med eerste addi ested eet ee ns las in Sie ah eA 279 9 1 2 Displaying Alaris aaa E N A 280 9 1 3 Acknowledging Alar 0 cccccetece etter erent eieee ee tiieeeeniie esse tees EANA EEES AEEA EAE EEES AE EEEn aE Enn nE nnne en nanena 282 9 1 4 Editing ANNAN scrisa R 2 9 2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B cccesceccestetsecseeeecnenseceeeeeesecsecsaecsaesesacaseaeeneey 284 9 2 1 OV CRMC hes E E E sais E E RE 284 9 2 2 Displaying Alarm S eccirni EAEE 285 9 2 3 Acknowledging Alarm Sse a A A aa EE val 288 9 2 4 Editing Alarm ceniris ei eee enter e ee ee eee eee eae AEEA EAEE EENAA 2 10 Operating RECIPES seirer omea aaea Eaa Oaea AS R keera aape EEA EROF TOEA EEEE ERR 10 1 OVI VOW periere EAE E AEEA E E env dv decent ceead 10 2 Structure OF A TEPE nannini aa a a a a a i a E A A a 10 3 Recpes ni the Projeti essri aa a ASS AA EE ESAR a amare 10 4 Displaying a RECIPE sess O R E eer 10 5 Recipe Values in the HMI Device and the PLC sassssseesssersesssnnsseenanrsnnuneennnnnnnnntennannananeenndananna ae 10 6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View ccccccccceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeacaeceeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeees kc 1061
140. a log to itself In the project check The log is not copied e if the CopyLog system function was properly configured e if the tag parameters are properly provided with data on the HMI device 80024 The CopyLog system function does not allow Edit the CopyLog system function in the project if copying when the target log already contains data necessary Before you initiate the system function delete Mode parameter The log is not copied the destination log file TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 342 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number 80025 Effect cause You have canceled the copy operation Data written up to this point are retained The destination log file if configured is not deleted The cancellation is reported by an error entry RT_ERR at the end of the destination log Remedy 80026 This alarm is output after all logs are initialized Values are written to the logs from then on Prior to this no entries are written to the logs irrespective whether WinCC flexible Runtime is active or not 80027 The internal Flash memory has been specified as the storage location for a log This is not permissible No values are written to this log and the log file is not created Configure Storage Card or a network path as the storage location 80028 The alarm returns a status report indicating that the logs are currently being ini
141. a lower bit rate If you use a higher bit rate you must use the PC PPI cable release 3 or higher The version code is printed on the cable e g E stand 3 corresponds to version 3 DIP switch LEDs Set the DIP switches 1 to 3 to the same bit rate as in WinCC flexible DIP switches 4 to 8 must be set to 0 DIP switch The following bit rates can be set Bit rate in kbit s DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 115 2 1 1 0 57 6 1 1 1 38 4 0 0 0 19 2 0 0 1 9 6 0 1 0 4 8 0 1 1 2 4 1 0 0 1 2 1 0 1 In the figure the bit rate is set to 115 2 kbit s TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 63 nstallation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device Note when connecting NOTICE USB connection sequence Observe the following sequence when connecting by USB 1 HMI device 2 PC USB host to host cable Use only the driver for the USB host to host cable that is included in the WinCC flexible package Never use the driver supplied with the USB host to host cable Updating the operating system If there is no HMI device image on the HMI device or the HMI device image is corrupt the operating system can only be updated via the HMI device s RS 485 interface or the PC PPI cable See also Interfaces on the TP 177A Page 51 Interfaces on the TP 177B 4 Page 51 Interfaces on
142. a user because perhaps you have PLC User These users are fixed components of exceeded the maximum number permitted delete the user management and cannot be deleted another user 260012 The passwords entered in the Change Password You have to log on to the system again Then enter the dialog and the confirmation field are not identical identical password twice to be able to change the The password has not been changed User will be password logged off 260013 The password entered in the Change Password You have to log on to the system again Then enter a dialog is invalid because it is already in use new password that has not been used before The password has not been changed User will be logged off 260014 User has unsuccessfully attempted to log on You can log on to the system with your correct password 3 times in succession Only an administrator can change the assignment to a The user has been locked out and assigned to group group no 0 270000 A tag is not indicated in the alarm because it Check if the data area for the tag exists in the controller attempts to access an invalid address in the the configured address is correct and the value range for controller the tag is correct 270001 There is a device specific limit as to how many alarms may be queued for output see the operating instructions This limit has been exceeded The view no longer contains all the alarms However all alarms are written
143. ab by touching the System amp icon The data displayed are device specific and may therefore deviate from that of your HMI device System Properties Microsoft Windows CE Version 5 00 2004 Microsoft Corp All rights reserved This computer program is protected by U S and international copyright laws Processor Type Samsung ARM920T S3C2410 Memory 47816 KB RAM Copyright to Microsoft Windows CE Details on processor and size of internal Flash memory Result The system properties are displayed This dialog is read only Close the dialog TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 165 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 6 10 Displaying memory distribution Introduction Requirements Procedure 166 The Memory system specific information provides you with information about the distribution and size of the memory in the HMI device NOTICE Memory tab Do not change the memory distribution in the Memory tab Applies for the usage of options An alteration to the memory distribution may be necessary Please refer to the accompanying documentation for further information You have opened the System Properties dialog box Memory tab by touching the System kez icon System Properties OK Ea General Memory Device Name Move slider to
144. able cable clamps e Route the equipotential bonding conductor and data cables in parallel with minimum clearance between these See following wiring diagram NOTICE Equipotential Bonding Conductor Cable shielding is not suitable for equipotential bonding Always use the prescribed equipotential bonding conductors The minimum cross section of a conductor used for equipotential bonding is 16 mm When you install MPI and PROFIBUS DP networks always use cables with a sufficient crosssection since otherwise the interface modules may be damaged or destroyed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 53 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device Wiring diagram ESE aE eae aaa E R a _ 6 Chassis terminal on the HMI device example Equipotential bonding conductor cross section 4 mm Cabinet Equipotential bonding conductor cross section min 16 mm2 Ground connection Cable clip Voltage bus Parallel routing of the equipotential bonding conductor and data cable V lt OHOOOHOHO See also Electromagnetic Compatibility Page 36 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 54 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device 4 3 6 Connecting the Power Supply Wiring diagram The figure below illustrates the connection between the power suppl
145. actured with the same process In this case the product variants differ in terms of their type and quantity of the components but not in terms of the manufacturing process sequence The configuration engineer can store the combination of each individual product variant in a recipe Field of application Recipes can be used everywhere the same product components are used in variable combinations to create different product variants Examples Beverage industry Food processing industry Pharmaceutical industry Paint industry Building materials industry Steel industry TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 291 Operating Recipes 10 2 Structure of a recipe 10 2 Structure of a recipe Recipes The recipe collection for the production of a product family can be compared to a file cabinet A recipe which is used to manufacture a product corresponds to a drawer in a file cabinet Example In a plant for producing fruit juice recipes are required for different flavors There is a recipe for example for the flavors orange grape apple and cherry File cabinet Recipe collection Recipes for a fruit juice plant Drawer Recipe Orange flavored drinks Drawer Recipe Grape flavored drinks Drawer Recipe Apple flavored drinks Drawer Recipe Cherry flavored drinks TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 292 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01
146. address in the controller 200001 Coordination is canceled because the write access to the address configured in the PLC is not possible Change the address or set the address in the controller at an area which allows write access 350 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number 200002 Effect cause Coordination is not carried out at the moment because the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format Remedy Internal error 200003 200004 Coordination can be executed again because the last error state is eliminated return to normal operation The coordination may not be executed 200005 No more data is read or written Possible causes e The cable is defective e The PLC does not respond is defective etc e System overload Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the controller is operational Restart the system if the system alarm persists 200100 Coordination is not executed because the address configured in the controller does not exist is not set Change the address or set up the address in the controller 200101 Coordination is canceled because the write access to the address configured in the PLC is not possible Change the address or set the address in the controller at an area which allows write access 200102
147. aeeeteenaeeseel 147 6 3 4 3 Setting the COUDIG ClCK seu ccc ccevecccauseccceesececcceaneeeccsateccuvansececenacceevitaeedsuna N LEENAN EEEE SEEE EA 6 3 4 4 Calibrating the touch SChGGM xs c cicseedececetecneedteeeesteneede dace dentine esbecaeeeetiaaeddiieee tates aa E 6 3 5 Changing password protection ssis danaa aAa NENADA AAA a ASAA 6 3 6 Changing the HMI device settings 2 0 0 ececceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseenaeeseenaeeaaes 0 3 6 1 Setting the date and IMG esc ive d cet acs cvtes epee E 6 3 6 2 Changing regional Settings i ccccceececceceetieacaneevarctavesteceeeseveaey aE NEE cdaeeed EEEE EEEE 155 6 3 6 3 Backup registry Information sessi iisas naaa E A EES E ad 156 6 3 6 4 Changing monitor SetingS sesser R A ieee E A OE A 6 3 6 5 Setting the screen Saver ooo eee eeeece ee eeee eee ee center ee eae ee eeeae eset eaaeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeseeeesaeeeseeaes 6 3 6 6 Changing the printer properties ccccceecceceecne cece ceeeeenaeceeeeeeeseaaeaeeeeeeeseccaeeeeeeeseseaeeaeseaeees 160 6 3 6 7 Restarting the HM G6ViCes icc ccsctcceccctenaececacneedeceendceeashcaeetvenaasdenaagieenesedeetttacdvauseeraunenieeestead 6 3 6 8 Displaying information about the HMI device ee eec cece eeneeeeenteeeeeetaeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeseeaeeeeeenteeees 164 6 3 6 9 Displaying system properties ee ecceeeeeee nee ceenneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseeeeesesaeeeseaeeeseeiaeeesesaeeeaeeeeeeaaes 6 3 6 10 Dis
148. all of the desired values touch the Gs button Result All values are read cyclically by the controller and entered in the Status Value column until the oe button is touched again Requirements for controlling The following requirements must be met to control values e The Control value column must be available e The Write button must be available Procedure Controlling a value Proceed as follows 1 Enter the address of a value for each line Enter the desired value in the Control value column Touch the respective columns to display the screen keyboard 2 Once you have entered all of the desired values touch the pa button Result The values from the Control value column are transferred once to the PLC TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 264 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 10 Operating the Sm rtClient View Overview The Sm rtClient view for PN DP HMI devices enables you to remotely monitor and operate an ongoing project on another HMI device When properly configured you can also access several democratic HMI devices on a remote HMI device Procedure Starting Remote Operation Proceed as follows 1 Switch to the screen with the Sm rtClient view on the HMI device The following options are available to establish a connection to the remote HMI device The connection is automatically established
149. alphanumerical screen keyboard opens The existing value is displayed in the screen keyboard and is selected 2 Enter the value You have the following options to enter a value The selected value is deleted when you enter the first character Completely reenter the value Use the lt and keys to move the cursor within the current value You can now edit or add to the characters of the current value Use the BSP key to delete the character to the left of the cursor If the value is selected use this key to delete the selected part of the value Using key Shift it is possible to switch between the keyboard levels of the screen keyboard On switchover the key assignments of the screen keyboard change Use the Help key to display the infotext of the I O field This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the input object or the current screen 3 Use the lt 4 key to confirm your entry or cancel it with ESC Either action closes the screen keyboard Result You have changed the alphanumerical value or entered a new one TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 255 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 5 4 Entering alphanumerical values on the TP 177B 4 Screen keyboard When you touch an operating element on the HMI device touch screen the screen keyboard appears This is the case for example for
150. also CAUTION Supply voltage With the supply voltage pay attention to a secure electrical separation Always use power supply modules that conform to IEC 364 4 41 or HD 384 04 41 VDE 0100 Part 410 Always use power supply modules that comply to SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage and PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage standards The power supply voltage must always be within the specified range to prevent malfunctions on the HMI device Equipotential bonding Connect the 24 V DC voltage to the GND conductor at a central connection point for equipotential bonding This ensures the GND supply for the HMI device Interfaces on the TP 177A Page 51 Interfaces on the TP 177B 4 Page 51 Interfaces on the TP 177B 6 Page 52 Interfaces on the OP 177B Page 52 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 57 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device 4 3 7 Connecting uninterruptible power supply on the TP 177B 4 Wiring diagram The following figure shows the connection between the uninterruptible power supply and HMI device The uninterruptible power supply is connected to the 24 V input and one of USB ports of the HMI device When connected to the USB port of the HMI device the following uninterruptible power supplies are supported SITOP DC UPS modules as of a rated power value of 6 A e g 6EP1931 2DC42 Uninterruptible power sup
151. ameters from your network administrator Does the network use DHCP for dynamic assignment of network addresses If not get a new TCP IP network address for the HMI device Which TCP IP address does the default gateway have If a DNS network is used what are the addresses of the name server If a WINS network is used what are the addresses of the name server General procedure for configuring the network The HMI device must be configured prior to network operation The configuration is basically divided into the following steps 1 Enter the computer name of the HMI device 2 Configure the network address 3 4 Save the settings Set the logon information TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 179 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 11 2 Setting the device name of the HMI device Introduction Requirements Procedure Result 180 The HMI device uses the device name to identify itself in the communication network You have opened the System Properties dialog box Device Name tab by touching the System amp icon System Properties General Memory Device Name l E These settings are used to identify bf your Windows CE device to other computers Please type a name without any spaces and a short description Device name mi M sEIat E Device descri
152. and care 11 2 Service and spare parts TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 324 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Specifications 12 1 Dimension drawings of the TP 177B 4 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 325 Specifications 12 2 Dimension drawings of the TP 177A and TP 177B 6 12 2 Dimension drawings of the TP 177A and TP 177B 6 SIMATIC PANEL TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 326 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Specifications 12 3 Dimension Drawings of the OP 177B 12 3 Dimension Drawings of the OP 177B TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 327 Specitications 12 4 Specifications of the TP 177A 12 4 Specifications of the TP 177A HMI Device Weight without packing Approx 750 g Display Type LCD STN blue mode Display area active 115 18 mm x 86 38 mm 5 7 Resolution 320 x 240 pixels 240 x 320 pixels with vertical mounting Colors displayable 4 shades of blue Contrast control yes Back lighting CCFL Half Brightness Life typical 50 000 h Input unit Type Resistive analog touch screen Memory Program memory 512 KB Supply voltage
153. ansfer 68 195 Operating system Configure 138 375 Index Configuring 81 96 Update via ProSave Updating 208 Updating using WinCC flexible Operation Recipe screen at Operation feedback 2 227 246 Optical Operator control options 144 Operator controls Recipe view 3 Simple recipe view 308 Optical feedback 2 Optical operation feedback option Option Installing with ProSave Installing with WinCC flexible Removing with ProSave Removing with WinCC flexible Options Network operation 143 P Parameter a rei Data channel 1 Password Deleting ag ma Entering 90 Password xe Password Restore Password Back up 239 Password 270 Password Restore Password Back up 271 Password list 238 Password properties Password protection 8 disabling Set up Windows CE taskbar 139 PC PPI Cable 22 22 Configuring the cable Setting the a ee PC connection 132 Peripherals Rated load 376 Permission k37 Pin assignment PROFINET interface 333 RJ45 plug connector 333 PLC Reading recipe data record 306 313 Transferring recipe 74 ora por 307 314 PLC_User 242 242 bad bra Potential differences Potentially explosive atmosphere Power failure Power supply Cable cross section 55 Connecting 5 Connecting the terminal block 56 Reverse polarity protection 56 State TP 177A 3 Wiring dasah 55 Printer Setting Setting properties Printer connection Se
154. ars Template Yes TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 24 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Overview 7 8 Functional scope with WinCC flexible Recipes Object Specification TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B Recipe Number 5 100 Data Records per Recipe 20 200 Entries per Recipe 20 200 Recipe screens No Yes Info texts Object Specification TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B Infotext Length no of characters 320 For alarms Yes For screens Yes For screen objects e g IO fields Yes Additional functions Object Specification TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B Screen settings Touch screen calibration Yes Contrast setting Yes Brightness setting Yes Screen saver Yes Language change Number of languages 5 16 Graphic object Vector and pixel graphics Yes Trend views Number 25 50 Trends per view Number 4 8 Task Planner Number of tasks 10 Text object Number 1000 2500 Security Number of Users 100 50 1 not with TP 177B 4 2 not with TP 177B 4 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 25 Overview 1 9 Software options 1 9 Software options The following software options are available for the TP 177B and the OP 177B e WinCC Flexible Sm rtService The Sm rtService option enables you to access a remote HMI device from the HMI device or PC via Ethernet e WinCC Flexibl
155. ates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The device system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation Commissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Trademarks Note the following A WARNING This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens Correct reliable operation of the product requires proper transport storage positioning and assembly as well as careful
156. ating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B General information Result 122 NOTICE Transfer mode using MPI PROFIBUS DP The bus parameters for MPI PROFIBUS DP transfer e g the MPI PROFIBUS DP address of the HMI device will be read from the project currently loaded on the HMI device You can change the settings for MPI PROFIBUS DP transfer To do this you must first end the project and then change the settings on the HMI device Then return to transfer mode The HMI device uses the new MPI PROFIBUS DP settings until you start a project or transfer a project to it The MPI PROFIBUS DP settings are then overwritten by the values from this project Transfer settings A project can only be transferred from the configuration PC to the HMI device when at least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device Do not change the transfer settings if a project is running or the HMI device is in transfer mode The MPI DP settings of the HMI device have been changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 16 Setting the Delay Time Introduction The project is opened following a delay time when the HMI device is switched on The Loader is displayed during the delay time Requirements a The
157. been terminated The Loader appears Procedure Proceed as follows to change settings in the Control Panel 1 Open the Control Panel with the Control Panel button 2 To open the required dialog double click on its icon 3 Change the tab as required 4 Make the necessary changes Touch the corresponding input object Use the screen keyboard of the HMI device to enter the new values in the text boxes Touch a button to operate it To open a selection list touch the triangle at the end of the field Touch the required entry from the selection list Touch the check box to activate or deactivate a check box Touch a radio button to select it 5 Confirm the selection with the ok button or abort the entry with the x button The dialog closes 6 Close the Control Panel with the X button The Loader appears TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 144 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Input with the screen keyboard A screen keyboard is available for data input The screen keyboard is displayed as soon as you touch a text box You can also call up the screen keyboard directly from the Control Panel Display methods for the screen keyboard You can change the display method for the screen keyboard and fix the position on the screen Confirm the entry with the button or abort the entry with
158. blank screen as the screen saver 3 Close the dialog and save your entries with OR Touch x to discard the entries NOTICE Activating the screen saver Generally you should always activate the screen saver Otherwise the screen contents may leave a burn in effect in the background if they appear for too long This effect is reversible however The screen saver for the HMI device has now been set TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 18 Displaying System Information Requirement The System Properties dialog has been opened with the System icon Procedure Displaying System Information Proceed as follows 1 Open the General tab The system information is displayed This dialog is read only System Properties Copyright to Microsoft Windows CE Information about the processor amount of the internal Flash memory and capacity of a memory card when inserted 2 Close the dialog with 0K TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 125 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Procedure Displaying Memory Information Proceed as follows 1 Open the Memory tab The memory information is displayed S
159. buttons Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired operating element within the screen The screen keyboard opens The existing value is displayed in the screen keyboard and is selected 2 Enter the value You have the following options to enter a value The selected value is deleted when you enter the first character Completely reenter the value Use the lt p gt keys to move the cursor within the current value You can now edit or add to the characters of the current value Use the 5S key to delete the character to the left of the cursor If the value is selected use this key to delete the selected part of the value Usingkeys aes aa a p Shift it is possible to switch between the levels of the screen keyboard On switchover the key assignments change 3 Use the lt key to confirm your entry or cancel it with Either action closes the screen keyboard Result You have changed the value or entered a new one TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 257 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 5 5 Entering and editing symbolic values Selection list When you touch a symbolic IO field on the HMI touch screen a selection list appears Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Touch the required symbolic IO field The selection list of the symbolic IO field is displayed You can scroll through the s
160. cable at the cable inlet of this enclosure exceeds 70 C or where the temperature on the wire branching point exceeds 80 C under operating conditions the temperature specifications of the cables must match the actually measured temperatures Put measures in place to ensure the rated voltage is not exceeded Any transient interference voltages above the rated value must not exceed 40 The HMI device should be protected from mechanical loads gt 4 J or gt 2 J in the region of the display Ensure that the atmosphere is not explosive during servicing Measures that impair or remove the protection type of the HMI device are not permitted while the system is in operation If the HMI device was dismantled check the mounting seal for damage before reassembling the HMI device A damaged porous or used mounting seal no longer meets the requirements of the protection type In this case the mounting seal must be replaced Turn the HMI device off if any cracks appear in the front coating holes are damaged or the front coating starts to peel off Exchange the HMI device Restart the system again after the device has been exchanged TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 35 Safety Instructions and General Notes 2 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility Repairs The HMI device is maintenance free In case of repair the HMI device must be shipped to the Return Center in Furth The
161. call up the screen keyboard The functions listed in the table and the entry of values may also be assigned to a softkey on the OP 177B Refer to the plant documentation for more information in this regard TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 301 Operating Recipes 10 6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View 10 6 2 Creating a recipe data record Introduction Requirements Procedure Result See also 302 You create a new recipe data record by modifying an existing record You then save the modified data record under a new name A screen with a recipe view is displayed Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe for which you want to create a new recipe data record Touch S A new recipe data record with the next available number is created If you change the new data record number to an existing data record number the existing data record is overwritten Enter values for the elements of the data record The elements of the recipe data record can be assigned default values depending on the configuration 4 Touch al 5 Enter a name for the data record The data record is saved under the new name If the recipe data record already exists a dialog is opened In this dialog specify whether the existing data record is to be overwritten The new recipe data record is saved to the selected recipe
162. ce eia ianea iiaa 2 7 3 Backup and Restore 2 2 c secncccvegcascascwencsanesseescushcasendsesacestesdsentaiedetenanddeceseetaeedneedsptsouaneeseestees 203 7 3 1 OW OR VIGW cos Spat seta seas eta caked a bsad e fiend ccusredazesStunededecaceiassd ceatedes vata a a a aa 203 7 3 2 Backup and Restore using WinCC flexible 0 0 0 cece cee cteene cree eeeenecnecnaeeaaeeesesaesessaseaeeneenes 204 7 3 3 Backup and Restore USING ProSave eeccceeeeneeeeceeenneeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeseeaaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeseneeess 206 7 4 Updating operating systems on the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 208 7 4 1 OW GIMIGW morerna eine aeae Bi bah cared N a e ea ae aa cael 208 7 4 2 Resetting to factory Settings ceeececeeeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseaaeeeeesaaeeeseaaeeessenaeeessnaeesaeeeeneaaes 209 7 4 3 Updating the operating system with WinCC flexible ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeenaees 209 7 4 4 Updating the operating system with ProSave ccccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaeesenaeeeseenaees 2 7 5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4 eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeaaees 212 7 5 1 OW GIVIGW Sisar tac doch sig eet Aoi ee a che Bike eee eee as 212 7 5 2 Reselling factory SCuiNGS cviiaccesenedeevadeeevsnecenetevvane tec vadeees vaccdetaaneces yanecedendy sis aneeetandataedees inde 213 7 5 3 Updating the operating system using WinCC flexible o oo eee eeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeee
163. ce is now set TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 123 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 17 Setting the Screen Saver Introduction Requirement Procedure Result 124 You can set a period of time for automatic activation of the screen saver on the HMI device The screen saver is automatically activated if the HMI device is not operated within the specified period of time The screen saver is deactivated when any key is pressed or the touch screen is touched The function assigned to that key is not triggered Screensaver OK x Screensaver becomes active after J Z minutes 1 Standard Blank Screen 2 Enter a 0 to disable the function The minimum time is 5 and the maximum is 71582 minutes 3 Period of time in minutes before the screen saver is activated Enter 0 to disable the screen saver The minimum value is 5 and the maximum value is 71582 minutes Screen saver setting Proceed as follows 1 Enter the number of minutes before the screen saver is to be activated Touch the input field A selection list is displayed Entering 0 disables the screen saver 2 Select either the standard screen saver or an empty screen Activate the Standard radio button to enable the screen saver Activate the Blank Screen radio button to enable a
164. ch as a button Selecting a language You can change project languages at any time Language specific objects are immediately output to the screen in the relevant language when you switch languages The following options are available for switching the language 1 A configured operator control object switches from one project language to the next in a list 2 A configured operator control directly sets the desired project language Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation 8 2 5 Entries and help within a project 8 2 5 1 Overview Screen keyboard 250 When you touch an operating element requiring entry on the HMI device touch screen a screen keyboard appears The screen keyboard is displayed in the following cases e An I O field is selected for input e A password must be entered for accessing a password protected function The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete Based on the configuration of the operating element the system displays different screen keyboards for entering numerical or alphanumerical values Note The screen keyboard display is independent of the configured project language TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B General procedure The operating elements of a screen are operated by touching the touch scree
165. ching on the HMI device If you still wish to access the loader an operating element must be configured to close the project 2 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The delay time for the HMI device is now set TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 169 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 9 Enabling PROFINET IO PROFINET IO If the HMI device is connected to the PLC via PROFINET function keys or buttons for example can be configured as PROFINET IO direct keys If PROFINET IO direct keys are used in the project they must be enabled Note If you enable PROFINET IO direct keys you cannot use the RS 422 RS 485 port for serial communication PROFINET IO direct keys and PROFIBUS DP direct keys are mutually exclusive Requirements You have opened the PROFINET dialog with the PROFINET f icon ET 10 enabled Device name max 240 characters rP178 O 08 00 06 1 1 22 33 MAC dress e Activating or deactivating the PROFINET IO direct keys Text box for the device name MAC address of the HMI device NOTICE Inconsistent device name If the device name does not match the device name entered in the HW Config of STEP 7 the direct keys do not work Use the device name from the HW Config of STEP 7 This device name does not correspond to the device name used
166. continues to run but may not fully show the new page TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 352 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 230200 The connection to the HTTP channel was Check the network connection interrupted due to an error This error is explained Check the server configuration in detail by another system alarm Data is no longer exchanged 230201 The connection to HTTP channel was established Data is exchanged 230202 WININET DLL has detected an error This error Depending on the cause usually occurs when an attempt to connect to the When an attempt to connect fails or a timeout error server fails or the server refuses to connect occurs because the client lacks the proper authorization z Checkihenetwork connection and the network An unknown server certificate may also be the cause if the connection is encrypted by means e Check the server address of SSL e Check if the web server is actually running on the The alarm text provides details destination computer This text is always in the language of the Faulty authorization Windows installation because it is returned by e The configured user name and or password do not the Windows OS match those on the server Establish consistency Process values are no longer exchanged When the server certificate is rejected Certificate signed by an unknown CA e E
167. control object The HMI device toggles to Transfer mode when automatic mode is set and a transfer is initiated on the configuring PC TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 195 Commissioning a project 7 1 Overview 7 1 2 Reusing Existing Projects You can reuse existing projects from the following HMI devices e Projects from TP 170A on the TP 177A or TP 177B e Projects from TP 170B on the TP 177B e Projects from OP 17 on the OP 177B e Projects from OP 170B on the OP 177B e Projects for the OP 77B for the TP 177B 4 e Projects for the TP 177B 6 for the TP 177B 4 The following cases are possible 1 A project created with ProTool is available Migrate the project to WinCC flexible and then switch the HMI device 2 A project created with WinCC flexible is available Switch the HMI device in WinCC flexible If you switch to TP 177B 4 the available images will automatically adapt to the broader screen on the HMI device For more information please see the online help for WinCC flexible or the WinCC flexible Migration user manual TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 196 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 1 3 Overview Data Transmission Options 7 1 Overview The table below shows the channels for data transfer between TP 177A TP 177B or OP 177B and a configuration computer
168. cover and seal adhere to each other without any gaps Make sure you use a protective cover that is in perfect condition Protective cover 7 Place the protective cover on the base frame and press down firmly You will find eight attachment points on the base frame Press the base frame and frame together at these points until you hear them engage 8 Insert the HMI device in the mounting cut out 9 Secure the HMI device as previously described in the operating instructions TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 322 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Maintenance and care 11 2 Service and spare parts Procedure for dismantling To remove the frame from the base frame insert a screwdriver of a suitable size into a slot on the base frame Then you can lever the frame from the base frame 11 2 Service and spare parts Repairs Service pack In case of repair the HMI device must be shipped to the Return Center in Furth The HMI device may only be repaired there The address is Siemens AG Industry Sector Returns Center Siemensstr 2 90766 Furth Germany A service pack can be ordered for servicing purposes It contains the following spare parts e Mounting seal e Mounting clamps e Terminal block 2 pin The service pack can be ordered from your Siemens representative TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 323 Maintenance
169. creen To prevent this you need to synchronized the values of the recipe data records on the TP 177B and OP 177B with the values of the recipe tags The recipe tags are always automatically synchronized on the TP 177A Synchronizing Recipe Tags on the TP 177B and OP 177B Note Recipe tags can only be synchronized with the enhanced recipe view on the TP 177B and OP 177B Synchronization of the recipe tags depends on the configuration of the enhanced recipe view e Automatic synchronization The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the associated recipe tags In this case changes to values in the recipe view have an immediate effect on the values of the associated recipe tags The values are only synchronized when an operator control that is outside the recipe view is operated e Synchronization by the user The values of the recipe view and the associated recipe tags are not synchronized automatically The configuration engineer has assigned the same function to the al button or a different operator control in the recipe view The recipe tags and the recipe view are only synchronized when you operate the buttons or the appropriate operator control TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 299 Operating Recipes 10 6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View Recipe Tags Online Offline 10 6 10 6 1 Operation 300 The configuration engineer can config
170. creen appears during startup After the operating system has been loaded the Loader opens Configuration PC General term for programming devices PGs and PCs on which plant projects are created using an engineering software Control request Triggers a function via the controller Controller General term for devices and systems with which the HMI device communicates e g SIMATIC S7 Display duration Defines whether and how long a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device EMC Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of electrical equipment to function properly in its electromagnetic environment without influencing this environment Engineering software Software for the creation of projects for process visualization see also project process visualization and runtime software TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 366 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Glossary Event Fault time Figure Flash memory Function key Functions are triggered by defined incoming events Events can be configured Events which can be assigned to a button include Press and Release for example Refers to the time interval between an activated and deactivated alarm Form of the visualization of all logically related process data for a plant The visualization of the process data can be supported by graphic objects Non volatile memory with EEPROM chips used as mobile storage medium or as memory
171. cript Recompile the configuration could therefore not be generated 20013 The scripting component of WinCC flexible Runtime Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime is not correctly installed Therefore no scripts can be executed 20014 The system function returns a value that is not Select the specified script in the configuration written in any return tag Check if the script name has been assigned a value 20015 Too many successive scripts have been triggered Find what is triggering the scripts Extend the times in short intervals When more than 20 scripts are e g the polling time of the tags which trigger the scripts queued for processing any subsequent scripts are rejected In this case the script indicated in the alarm is not executed 30010 The tag could not accept the function result Check the tag type of the system function parameter e g when it has exceeded the value range 30011 A system function could not be executed because Check the parameter value and tag type of the invalid the function was assigned an invalid value or type parameter If a tag is used as a parameter check its in the parameter value 40010 The system function could not be executed since Check the parameter types in the configuration the parameters could not be converted to a common tag type TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 338 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms
172. ct 7 3 Backup and Restore 7 3 2 Backup and Restore using WinCC flexible Requirements e The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC e No project is open in WinCC flexible e The data channel is configured on the HMI device Procedure for backup Proceed as follows 1 On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens 2 Select the type of HMI device 3 Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC Set the connection parameters 4 Close the dialog with OK 5 Select the Backup command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The SIMATIC ProSave Backup dialog opens 6 Select the data to be backed up 7 Select a destination folder and a file name for the psb backup file 8 Set Transfer mode on the HMI device Result If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the HMI device automatically sets Transfer mode when a backup is initiated Start the backup operation in WinCC flexible with Start Backup on the configuration PC Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation The system outputs a message when the backup is completed The relevant data is now backed up on the configuration PC 204 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Opera
173. ctivation of a screen or the closing an alarm window Function keys with local function assignment A function key with local function assignment is screen specific and is therefore only effective within the active screen The function assigned to a function key can vary from screen to screen The function key of a screen can be assigned one function only either a global or local one The local assignment function takes priority over the global setting Function keys as system keys Function keys can also be configured as system keys For example they can function as the numerical keypad the cursor keypad or as a section of the alphanumerical keypad Multi key operation Unwanted actions may be triggered if the operator unintentionally actuates a key combination caution Unintentional actions In Online mode simultaneous operation of more than two keys may cause unintentional actions in the plant Do not press more than two keys simultaneously TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 248 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 3 Direct keys Introduction Direct keys TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Direct keys on the HMI device are used to set bits in the I O area of a SIMATIC S7 Direct keys enable operations with short reaction times that
174. d Rating label DIP switch Interface name 18 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Overview 1 4 Design of the TP 177B 4 HMI device 1 4 Design of the TP 177B 4 HMI device Front view and side view Display touch screen Slot for a MultiMedia Secure Digital card Recess for mounting clamps SROMOMS Mounting seal Bottom view Interfaces Recess for mounting clamps TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 19 Overview 7 5 Design of the OP 177B HMI Device Rear view 1 5 0O00 Slot for a MultiMedia Secure Digital card Rating label DIP switch Interface name Design of the OP 177B HMI Device Front view and side view 20 Slot for a MultiMedia card Display touch screen Recesses for mounting clamps Mounting seal TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Overview 7 5 Design of the OP 177B HMI Device Bottom view of an OP 177B DP Rear view Slot for a MultiMedia card Rating label DIP switch Interface name TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 21 Overview 7 6 Accessories 1 6 Accessories Accessory kit The accessory kit contains the following e For the power supply
175. d The system discards the entry and restores the original value Possible cause 2 The connection to the controller was interrupted Make sure that the value entered lies within the range of values of the control tags Check the connection to the PLC 190012 It is not possible to convert a value from a source format to a target format for example An attempt is being made to assign a value to a counter that is outside the valid PLC specific value range A tag of the type Integer should be assigned a value of the type String Check the range of values or the data type of the tags 190100 The area pointer is not updated because the address configured for this pointer does not exist Type Warning alarms Error alarms Controller acknowledgment HMI device acknowledgment LED mapping Trend request Trend transfer 1 Trend transfer 2 o consecutive number shown in WinCC flexible ES ZONON AOUN Check the configuration 190101 The area pointer is not updated because it is not possible to map the PLC type to the area pointer type Parameter type and no See alarm 190100 190102 The area pointer is updated after the cause of the last error state has been eliminated return to normal operation Parameter type and no See alarm 190100 200000 Coordination is not executed because the address configured in the controller does not exist is not set Change the address or set up the
176. d Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation The user data is encrypted and saved on the HMI device to protect it from loss due to power failure Note Depending on the transfer settings changes to the user data are overwritten when the project is transferred again User View Use the User view to display the users on the HMI device All users on the HMI device system are displayed in the User view to the administrator or to a user with administrator permissions When user management permission is lacking only the personal user entry is displayed The configuration engineer can implement simple or advanced User view in the project The two user views offer the same functions and differ only in the display of information Simple User View The simple user view only displays the user name and user group Group 9 PLC User Group 1 User 1 Group 1 lt New user gt Enhanced User View The enhanced user view displays information about the users TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 270 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Backup and Restore The users passwords group assignments and logoff times set up on the HMI device can be backed up and restored This prevents you having to enter all of the data again on another HMI device NOTICE During a restore the currently valid user da
177. d input fields 2 Close the dialog with OK The password protection for the Control Panel has been removed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A 6 1 2 7 Changing MPI DP Settings Requirement Procedure Result The MPI DP Transfer Settings dialog has been opened with the MPI DP Settings ili icon MPLDP Transfer Settings Address 1 1 Baudrate 187 5 kBaud _ 6 Bus address of the HMI device Data transmission rate Proceed as follows 1 Enter the bus address for the HMI device in the Address input field Touch the input field The numerical screen keyboard is displayed 2 Select the data transfer rate for communication in the Baud rate input field Touch the input field The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed 3 Close the dialog with OR NOTICE Address in the MPI PROFIBUS DP network The value specified in the Address input field should be used in an MPI PROFIBUS DP network just once Note During the transfer of a project to the HMI device the MPI DP settings will be overwritten with the values from the transferred project The MPI DP settings of the HMI device have been changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 91 Configurin
178. d TP 177B 6 Introduction The HMI screen can be cleaned when it is switched on and a project is running An operating element must be available in the project to open the clean screen After activating the clean screen the touch screen and function keys are locked for the configured interval The time the touch screen is locked can be set between 5 and 30 seconds The time remaining for the lockout is indicated by a progress bar NOTICE Unintentional actions Clean the HMI device screen during operation with activated clean screen or switch off the HMI device Once the period for the clean screen has passed operations are again possible The HMI device cannot be operated with an active clean screen When the clean screen is active operations on the HMI device are not possible Wait for the period for the clean screen to lapse Then you can operate the plant again with the HMI device 11 1 3 Protective Membrane Protective foil A protective foil is available for the HMI touch screens The protective foil is not part of the scope of delivery of the HMI device Required order information is available on the Internet at http mall automation siemens com The self adhesive protective foil prevents the screen from being scratched and soiled The mat surface of the protective foil reduces reflections under unfavorable lighting The protective film can be removed without leaving any adhesive residue on the scre
179. d error with error code 1 that cannot be described in more detail occurred The action is canceled It is possible that the data record was not installed correctly on the controller Remedy Check the storage location the data record the Data record area pointer and if necessary the connection to the controller Restart the action after a short time If the error persists contact Customer Support Forward the relevant error code to Customer Support 290041 A data record or file cannot be saved because the storage location is full Delete files no longer required 290042 An attempt was made to execute several recipe actions simultaneously The last action was not executed Trigger the action again after waiting a short period 290043 Confirmation request before storing data records 290044 The data store for the recipe has been destroyed and is deleted 290050 Message reporting that the export of data records has started 290051 Message reporting that the export of data records was completed 290052 Message reporting that the export of data records was canceled due to an error Ensure that the structure of the data records at the storage location and the current recipe structure on the HMI device are identical 290053 Message reporting that the import of data records has started 290054 Message reporting that the import of data records was completed
180. depending on the HMI device used e Updating the operating system without reset to factory setting First set Transfer mode on the HMI device or use the automatic transfer function if the project is active Then start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible e Updating the operating system with reset to factory setting First start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible Then switch the power on the HMI device off and on again Note Updating the operating system by resetting to factory settings must be carried out in the following cases e No operating system is loaded on the HMI device e The operating system of the HMI device is damaged Point to point coupling with a PC PPI cable is necessary in order to update the operating system with reset to factory settings In ProSave or WinCC flexible set the Reset to factory state check box status according to your selected operating system update mode 7 4 3 Updating the operating system with WinCC flexible Requirements e The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC e No project is open in WinCC flexible e When updating the operating system without reset to factory setting only The data channel is configured on the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 209 Commissioning a project 7 4 Updating operating systems on the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Pr
181. device is given forced permission to control the remote HMI device You attempt to operate the remote HMI device A dialog appears in which you are prompted to enter the appropriate password for remote control You can now operate the remote HMI device e f another HMI device is accessing your HMI device via the Sm rtClient view you can force local operating permission for your HMI device Touch the screen of your HMI device five times in sequence You now receive operating permission on the local HMI device Procedure Ending Remote Operation You can end remote monitoring and remote control with one of the following methods depending on the configuration e By touching a button configured for this action e By exiting the screen containing the Sm rtClient view e If configured a menu appears when you touch an empty location for a given period Touch the menu item Close Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic Note If another HMI device is accessing your HMI device via the Sm rtClient view this results in additional load on your HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 266 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 11 Operating Trends 8 2 11 1 Overview Trends Trends continuously display the current process data Trend view Trends a
182. displayed in sequence during the backup process Saving registry data Copy files A progress bar shows the status of the backup process When the backup process is completed the following message is displayed The operation completed successfully Acknowledge this message The dialog closes The HMI device data is now saved on the external memory TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 187 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 12 2 Restoring from external storage device Introduction Requirements 188 A restore operation deletes the old data from flash memory of the HMI device on confirmation The data stored on the external memory is then copied to the internal flash memory e The external memory holding the backed up data is inserted in the HMI device e You have opened the Backup Restore dialog with the Backup Restore icon Backup Restore All other application must be ended before starting lt BACKUP gt or lt RESTORE gt Backup to storage card BACKUP Restore from storage card RESTORE NOTICE Loss of data possible All data on the HMI device will be deleted during a restore operation License keys are deleted after counter inquiry Back up the HMI device s data before restoring if required External memory with data backup If s
183. dure Result 104 You can start application in the Control Panel and in Windows CE with a double click two brief touches is sequence Set the time between two touches in the Control Panel Ss The Mouse Properties dialog has been opened with the Mouse icon Mouse Properties ok a Double Click Double click this grid to set the double click sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between clicks Double click this icon to test your double click settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above eC a Touch the pattern twice in sequence to set the time and spatial distance between the touches on the screen Specimen Icon Touch the icon twice in sequence to check the settings of your double click If the icon does not change adjust your settings using the pattern again Proceed as follows 1 Touch the pattern twice The pattern is displayed in inverse colors at the second touch he 2 Touch the icon twice If the double click is detected the icon is displayed as follows at the second touch Ps 3 If the icon remains unchanged double click on the pattern again 4 Close the dialog and save your entries with OK Touch X to discard the entries The double click on the touch screen is now set TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating
184. e 362 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Abbreviations CPU CSV CTS DC DCD DIL DP DSN DSR DTR EMC EN PG PLC PPI RAM RJ45 RTS Central Processing Unit Comma Separated Values Clear To Send Direct Current Data Carrier Detect Dual in Line electronic chip housing design Distributed I O Data Source Name Data Set Ready Data Terminal Ready Electromagnetic Compatibility European standard Engineering System Electrostatic Discharge the components and modules endangered by such Electrostatic Sensitive Device Ground High Frequency Human Machine Interface International Electronic Commission Interface Input and Output Light Emitting Diode Metal Oxide Semiconductor Multipoint Interface SIMATIC S7 Microsoft Mean Time Between Failures Not connected Operator Panel Personal Computer Programming device Programmable Logic Controller Point to Point Interface SIMATIC S7 Random Access Memory Registered Jack Type 45 Request To Send TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 363 Abbreviations 364 RxD SELV SP STN Sub D TAB TCP IP TFT TxD UL Receive Data Safety Extra Low Voltage Service Pack Super Twisted Nematic Subminiature D plug Tabulator Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Thin Film Transistor Transmit Data Underwriter s Laboratory TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Opera
185. e and select the motion control screen on the required The movements can no longer be controlled display unit 320001 The network is too complex View the network in STL The faulty addresses cannot be indicated 320002 No diagnostics alarm selected Select a diagnostics alarm from the ZP_ALARM alarm The unit belonging to the alarm could not be screen selected 320003 No alarms exists for the selected unit The detail Select the defective unit from the overview screen view cannot visualize any networks 320004 The required signal states could not be read by the Check the consistency between the configuration on the PLC The faulty addresses cannot be found display unit and the PLC program 320005 The project contains ProAgent elements which are In order to run the project install the optional ProAgent not installed ProAgent diagnostic functions cannot package be performed 320006 You have attempted to execute a function which is Check the type of the selected unit not supported in the current constellation 320007 No error triggering addresses were found on the Switch the detail screen to STL layout mode and check networks the status of the addresses and exclusion addresses ProAgent cannot indicate any faulty addresses 320008 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are Download the project to the HMI device again not synchronized with those in the PLC ProAgent can only indicate the diagnostic units 320009
186. e 333 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 51 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device 4 3 3 Interfaces on the TP 177B 6 The figure below shows the interfaces of the TP 177B 6 HMI device Chassis terminal for equipotential bonding Power supply connector RS 422 485 interface IF 1B PROFINET connection applies to TP 177B 6 PN DP USB connection OO0 O See also Power Supply Page 332 X10 IF 1B RS 422 RS 485 Page 332 X20 USB Page 333 X1 PROFINET Page 333 4 3 4 Interfaces on the OP 177B The figure below shows the interfaces of the OP 177B HMI device Chassis terminal for equipotential bonding Power supply connector RS 485 RS 422 interface IF 1B PROFINET connection applies to OP 177B PN DP USB connection O amp OH BO See also Power Supply Page 332 X10 IF 1B RS 422 RS 485 Page 332 X20 USB Page 333 X1 PROFINET Page 333 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 52 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device 4 3 5 Connecting the Equipotential Bonding Circuit Potential Differences Differences in potential between spatially separated system parts can lead to high equalizing currents over the data cables and therefore to the destruction of their interfaces This situation may arise if the cable shielding is terminat
187. e Recipe View 10 7 Operating the Simple Recipe View 10 7 1 Overview The simple recipe view consists of three areas You can use the shortcut menu to operate each of these display areas Introduction e Recipe list e Record list e Element list Operation The simple recipe view can be operated as follows e Create recipe data records e Save recipe data records or save them under a new name e Rename recipe data records e Delete recipe data records e Transfer recipe data records from the PLC and to the PLC Operator controls of the simple recipe view Toggle between the display areas and the shortcut menus to operate the simple recipe views The table below shows the operation of the display area Operation Touching an entry Function The next lower display area opens i e the data record list or the element list The next higher display area opens i e the recipe list or the data record list The shortcut menu of the display area opens The previous entry is selected in the display area The next entry is selected in the display area A display page is scrolled up in the display area oe fom Ls Le Le CA A display page is scrolled down in the display area The table below shows the operation of the shortcut menu Operation Function The menu is closed The display area opens Touch the menu command The menu command is executed
188. e Sm rtAccess The Sm rtAccess option enables you to set up communication between different HMI systems The following software options are available for the TP 177B 4 e Uninterruptable Power Supply UPS with USB support When interfacing an uninterruptible power supply the HMI device is shut down ina controlled manner after a buffer time in the event of a power failure The TP 177B 4 supports SITOP DC UPS modules connected via the USB port 1 10 Communication Using the TP 177A Number of Connections Interconnection TP 177A Number with MPI PROFIBUS DP 4 on the same bus Siemens Controllers The following table shows the Siemens controllers and protocols or profiles that can be used Controller Protocol Profile TP 177A SIMATIC S7 200 PPI yes MPI 1 yes SIMATIC S7 300 400 MPI yes PROFIBUS DP up to 1 5 Mbps yes PROFIBUS DP up to 12 Mbps no 1 If you require a baud rate of 9 6 Kbps use the DP profile in WinCC flexible TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 26 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Overview 1 11 Number of Connections Communication Using the TP 177B and OP 177B 1 11 Communication Using the TP 177B and OP 177B Interconnection Number using a point to point connection TP 177B 1 OP 177B Number using a bus connection 4 on the same bus Siemens Controllers The following table shows the Siemens controllers and
189. e Table The trend values can be read from the value table if this is configured Ruler The exact trend values can be read from the ruler if this is configured 8 1 6 2 Operating the Trend View Value Table The trend values are displayed in the value table When the ruler is displayed the trend values are shown at a position of the ruler When the ruler is hidden the latest trend values are displayed Ruler When configured a ruler is available to provide an exact reading of the individual values The position of the ruler can be changed by touching and dragging it on the touch screen The configuration engineer can configure the following actions for operator controls outside the Trend display e Display or hide ruler e Move ruler forward e Move ruler backward Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Other Operator Actions The configuration engineer can configure the following actions for operator controls outside the Trend display e Enlarge display of time intervals e Reduce display of time intervals e Scroll back by one display width e Scroll forward by one display width e Stop or resume trend recording Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 245 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 8 2 1 Operating a project on T
190. e When you touch the touch screen e A message is displayed Screensaver Settings Wait time 0 minutes TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Enter the number of minutes before the screen saver is to be activated Touch the input field You can enter a value between 5 and 360 minutes Entering 0 deactivates the screen saver 2 Close the dialog and save your entries with OR Touch X to discard the entries NOTICE Activating the screen saver You should always activate the screen saver Otherwise the screen contents may leave a burn in effect in the background if they appear too long This effect is reversible however Result The screen saver for the HMI device has now been set 6 1 2 9 Configuring the Data Channel Introduction If you block all data channels the HMI device is protected against unintentional overwriting of the project data and HMI device image Requirement The Transfer Settings dialog has been opened with the Transfer Ta tall icon Transfer Settings Group for the data channel 1 channel 1 Group for the data channel 2 channel 2 Button for the MPI DP Transfer Settings dialog TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 93
191. e action is not executed The following remedies are available e Check the source for the number constant or tag value e First delete the data record e Change the Overwrite function parameter TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 357 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 290014 The file specified to be imported could not be Check found e The file name e Ensure that the file is in the specified directory 290020 Message reporting that the download of data records from the HMI device to the PLC has started 290021 Message reporting that the download of data records from the HMI device to the PLC was completed 290022 Message reporting that the download of data Check in the configuration whether records from the HMI device to the PLC was e The tag addresses are configured in the controller canceled due to an error e The recipe number exists e The data record number exist e The Overwrite function parameter is set 290023 Message reporting that the download of data records from the PLC to the HMI device has started 290024 Message reporting that the download of data records from the PLC to the HMI device was completed 290025 Message reporting that the download of data Check in the configuration whether records from the PLC to the HMI device was e The
192. e alarm class symbols Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic Displaying infotext The configuration engineer can also provide infotext for alarms Proceed as follows to view the infotext for an alarm 1 Select the required alarm in the Alarm view 2 Touch e If configured the infotext assigned to this alarm is displayed 3 Close the infotext window with K TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 281 Operating Alarms 9 1 Operating Alarms TP 177A Alarm indicator The alarm indicator is a graphic symbol that shows current errors or errors that need to be acknowledged depending on the configuration N 3 The alarm indicator flashes as long as alarms are queued for acknowledgment The number indicates the number of queued alarms The configuration engineer can assign functions to be executed when the alarm indicator is operated Usually the alarm indicator is only used for error alarms Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic 9 1 3 Acknowledging Alarms Requirements Procedure Result See also 282 e The alarm which is to be acknowledged is displayed in the Alarm window or in the Alarm view e Either the Alarm window or the Alarm view is enabled e The alarm must be acknowledged Proceed as follows 1 Select the alarm by touching it in the Alarm
193. e image file img The HMI device image files are available under WinCC flexible Images in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD In the output area you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image file after it is opened Select Update OS on the PC to start the Reset to factory settings process In the Control Panel of the HMI device open the OP Properties dialog and select the Device tab Click on the Reboot button A query is opened Click on the Prepare for Reset button Follow the instructions in ProSave During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device The factory settings are reset Note If you can no longer call the Control Panel on the HMI device as the operating system is missing switch off the HMI device Then reset to factory settings and restart the HMI device If the HMI device doesn t start up switch it off and then on again Note Calibrating the touch screen After the reset you may have to recalibrate the touch screen TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 6 Installing and Removing Options 7 6 Installing and Removing Options 7 6 1 Overv
194. e itself A status is reported when it is received An alarm could trigger one of the following alarm events Incoming Outgoing Acknowledge The configuration engineer defines which alarms must be acknowledged by the user An alarm may contain the following information 284 Date Time Alarm text Error location State Alarm class Alarm number Acknowledgement group Diagnostics capability TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Alarms Alarm Classes Alarm Buffer 9 2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B Alarms are assigned to various alarm classes e Error Alarms in this class must always be acknowledged Alarms normally indicate critical errors within the plant such as Motor temperature too high e Warning Warning alarms usually indicate states of a plant such as Motor switched on e System System alarms indicate states or events which occur on the HMI device e SIMATIC diagnostic alarms SIMATIC diagnostic alarms show states and events of the SIMATIC S7 or SIMOTION controllers e User specific alarm classes The properties of this alarm class must be defined in the configuration Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Alarm events are saved to an internal buffer The size of this alarm buffer depends on the HMI device type 9 2 2 Displaying Alarms Alarm view Alarm window Alarms a
195. e or changing screens exceeds this logoff time the user is automatically logged off The user must then log in again to continue to operate objects assigned password protection Passwords If an administrator or a user with administrator permission is logged on all users on the HMI device are displayed in the User view If a user without user management permission is logged on only the personal user entry is displayed The permissions of a user after logging in depends on the user group to the user is assigned Additional information on this may be available in your plant documentation The user data is encrypted and saved on the HMI device to protect it from loss due to power failure Note Depending on the transfer settings changes to the user data are overwritten when the project is transferred again User view Use the User view to display the users on the HMI device Group 9 a PLC User Group 1 n User Group 1 lt New User gt If an administrator or a user with administrator permission is logged on all users on the HMI device are displayed in the User view If a user without user management permission is logged on only the personal user entry is displayed The group to which each user is assigned is displayed next to the user names As administrator or user with user management permission you can also add new users Use the lt New User gt entry TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible
196. e path specified or there is close other applications insufficient memory space 70011 The system time could not be modified Check the time which is to be set The error alarm only appears in connection with Using Windows NT 2000 XP The user executing area pointer Date time PC Possible causes WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted the right to e An invalid time was transferred in the job change the system time of the operating system mailbox e The Windows user has no right to modify the system time If the first parameter in the system alarm is displayed with the value 13 the second parameter indicates the byte containing the incorrect value 70012 An error occurred when executing the function Close all programs currently running StopRuntime with the option Runtime and Then close Windows operating system Windows and WinCC flexible Runtime are not closed One possible cause is that other programs cannot be closed 70013 The system time could not be modified because an Check the time which is to be set invalid value was entered Incorrect separators may have been used 70014 The system time could not be modified Check the time which is to be set Possible causes e Aninvalid time was transferred e The Windows user has no right to modify the system time e Windows rejects the setting request Using Windows NT 2000 XP The user executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted the right to change
197. e process f necessary abort the backup and first back up the License Keys of the HMI device For more information refer to the section Transferring and transferring back license keys Page 225 Then restart the restore process Follow the instructions in ProSave A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation When the restore is successfully completed the data backed up on the PC is now on the HMI device Procedure for restoring by resetting to factory settings on the TP 177A On the TP 177A when restoring data you can also reset the HMI device to factory settings Proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 5 Result Switch off power to the HMI device Execute steps 1 through 5 as described in Procedure for restoring Select the Bootstrap check box Execute steps 7 through 8 as described under Procedure for restoring Switch on the power supply of the HMI device When the restore is successfully completed the data backed up on the PC is now on the HMI device The HMI device is reset to factory settings TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 207 Commissioning a project 7 4 Updating operating systems on the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 7 4 7 4 1 Updating operating systems on the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Overview Updating the operating system 208 A compatibility conflict may occur when
198. e security system you can execute password protected functions on the HMI device for which you have authorizations If you enter an incorrect password an error message is displayed when an Alarm window has been configured 8 2 12 3 User Logoff Requirements You have logged into the security system of the HMI device Procedure You have the following options for logging off e The user is logged off automatically if no operations are carried out and if the logoff time has been exceeded e By touching the operating object that was configured for logging off Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation If an incorrect password is entered the logged on user is also logged off Result The user is no longer logged into the project In order to operate an operator control object with password protection you must first log in again TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 272 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 12 4 Creating a User Requirements New users are created in the user view To display the user view switch to the screen that contains the user view To create a new user you must have user management permission Procedure Creating a User in the Simple User View Proceed as follows 1 Touch the lt New User gt entry in the user view The following dialog appears User Password
199. e sesezeeeiansclans veeeezet tations a EAN TE ER Ea read eaters vines 6 2 2 14 Changing Regional Settings 0 ec cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeees 6 2 2 15 Changing MPI PROFIBUS DP Settings ccc eeeccceceeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeseeaeeeseaes 6 22 16 Settingithe Delay Time asic spccseteccadecct iesancte eae npeuueed cbedoe ened cies besteses ppeteant aataart epidenes ieleaet eaelepenecarened 6 2 2 17 Setting the Sereen SAVER esci ccsecsccesceseseescevenavaneceeeceeececbeaeceatenbecabeneedeavensveatebadeeanenteennenas EE 6 2 2 18 Displaying System Information ssassn nnana anaana AANA aA NAA D A 6 2 2 19 Configuring the Data Channel c cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeseeeeeeseeeseeaeees 6 2 2 20 Overview of Network Operation c cccceceececeeeeeeecaecee cece senaaeaeeeeeeeeceaaaeceeeesesecaacaeeeeenseeeeeeds 6 2 2 21 Setting the Device Name of the HMI DeVICE cecccce cee cetecteeeeceseteeaeeseeeesectaseseeecneenaes 131 6 2 2 22 Activating a Direct CONNECTION 0 ec eect eceeeeee ee teee eee teneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeteeeseeaeees TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Table of contents 6 2 2 23 Changing Network Senos se eieraveictintaieentierieiyateiersdenien Therieaeiye tinea deeniieleieeedea tes 6 2 2 24 Changing the Logon
200. e symbolic screen keyboard opens and the existing value is displayed in the screen keyboard 2 Select an item from the selection list You have the following options to enter a value Set the cursor directly on the entry in the selection list by touching the entry Move the cursor to an entry in the selection list using the a 4 b o Select the EE key to view the infotext of the symbolic IO field This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the symbolic IO field or for the screen which contains the IO field 3 Use the lt lt key to confirm your entry or cancel it with sas Either action closes the screen keyboard Result You have changed the symbolic value or entered a new one TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 235 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A 8 1 3 5 Entering and Modifying the Date and Time Entering the Date and Time See also 8 1 3 6 Purpose Enter the date and time in the same way you enter alphanumerical values Note When entering the date and time please note that the format is determined by the configured project language Entering and Editing Alphanumerical Values Page 233 Setting the Project Language Page 229 Viewing infotext The configuration engineer uses infotext to provide additional information and operating instructions with respect to screens a
201. e the plastic surface of the touch screen Always operate the touch screen with your fingers or with a touch pen only Triggering unintended actions Touching several operator controls at the same time can trigger unintended actions Always touch only one operator control on the screen TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 72 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operator Controls and Displays Function keys See also 5 2 Connecting a memory card to the TP 177B 6 and OP 177B On the TP 177B 4 you can also use the function keys F1 to F4 for inputs Information can be also entered on the OP 177B using the function keys F1 to F14 and K1 to K18 The function assigned to a specific function key is defined during configuration The function keys have no function before a project has been opened NOTICE Damage to the keyboard possible Always use your fingers to operate the keys of your HMI device Using hard instruments to press the keys considerably reduces the service life of the key mechanism Design of the TP 177A HMI Device Page 16 Design of the TP 177B 4 HMI device Page 19 Design of the TP 177B 6 HMI device Page 17 Design of the OP 177B HMI Device Page 20 5 2 Connecting a memory card to the TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Approved memory cards Only use MultiMediaCards tested and approved by Siemens AG for the respective HMI device NOTICE The SIMATIC S7 MultiM
202. e user view switch to the screen that contains the user view To add a new user you must have user management permission Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Touch the lt New User gt entry in the user view The following dialog appears User Group Group 1 1 ie 2 Enter the desired user information Touch the corresponding input field The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed The password may not contain space characters or the special characters 2 H For the logoff time you can use values of 0 to 60 minutes The value 0 stands for no automatic logoff 3 Touch the OK button Result The new user is created TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 241 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A 8 1 4 5 Changing user data Requirements Procedure Result 242 Change user data in the user view To display the user view switch to the screen that contains the user view The following options are available for the range of changes that can be made The administrator or a user with user management permission can change the data for all users on the HMI device system in the user view User name Group assignment Password Logoff time Users without user management permission can only change their own user data Password Logoff time Note You can only chan
203. e your entries with OR Touch x to discard the entries Result The settings for the printer have now been changed The list of current printers and required settinas for HMI devices can be found on the Internet under http support automation siemens com WW view en 11376409 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 117 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 14 Changing Regional Settings Introduction Requirement The display format of the date time and decimal point etc differ from region to region You can adjust the regional settings on the HMI device to meet local requirements The Regional Settings Properties dialog has been opened with the Regional Settings icon Regional Settings Properties Regional Number Time Date Many programs support 2 international settings Changing Regional Settings affects the way these programs display and sort dates times and numbers Region selection list Procedure Changing Regional Settings Proceed as follows 1 Touch the Regional selection list for the language in the Regional Settings tab 2 Select the desired language To do this touch the input field The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed Procedure Changing the Number Format 118 Proceed as follows 1 Open the Number tab 2
204. eaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeseeaeeeseenaeeseenneeaes k 10 7 5 Reading a Recipe Data Record from the PLC 0 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeseeeeetaeeeeees 10 7 6 Transferring a Recipe Data Record to the PLC ssssessssnesssnnesrnnunsennnennnnnnnnnenannnnunnnnnannn ananman 10 8 Exporting Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP 177B ccccccseeceeceeeeteesetteetees 10 9 Importing Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP 177B cccccseseceeceeeeeeeetteeeeeeeees Maintenance and Care scvccci ss esesdcvincasecceScevcetavescosdevantiensctavesansies nne EE NETE EENEI EESE EAEE NEEE 11 1 Maintenance and Service niian ania iiini anaana aana aa a ada Ea aaae a aa k 11 11 Maintenance and care iien 3 citcietsaacteatanadaint a a a a a aa a aaa k 11 1 2 Clean screen on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6 ccccececceceeeeeseneeceeeeeeeeecacaeeeeeeesesenneeeeeeentees i 11 1 3 Protective Membrane ccccccceceeeceneceecenaeeeceeeeeeececeeceeeeesecanaeceeeeeseceeaeaeeeeeseeeeueeesesaaneeeeeeess k 11 1 4 Protective covers on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6 ooo cececccceeeeeceece cece eeeececaeceeeeeeetecaeeeeeeeeetes 11 2 Service ANG spare parts sisccicendececseiiseteaticcacaeulys cabnad eedincs Codeaaeth cca E A a aaa SEEE SPOSCHIGALIONS ai ccecdiseschiics cites setters ctieavedadeawtvectedsiees EANA RN ENEEK R EE REAA E AEAEE ARENAEN EEEREN EE 12 1 Dimension drawings of the TP 177B 4 oo eccceceeceeeeeee
205. echnical Support You can reach the Technical Support for all A amp D products using the support request form on the web http www siemens de automation support request Phone 49 180 5050 222 Fax 49 180 5050 223 For further information about Siemens Technical Support refer to the Internet at http www siemens com automation support request Service amp Support on the Internet Service amp Support provides additional information on SIMATIC products through online services at http support automation siemens com e The newsletter provides up to date information relating to your products e Our Service amp Support search engine provides you access to all available documentation e A forum for global exchange of information by users and experts e Current product information FAQs and downloads e Your local Automation amp Drives representative e Information about on site services repairs spare parts and much more is available on our Services pages TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 7 Preface TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 8 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Table of contents PROTACE is seco panes A E A E agaeacc dudes A E TT 1 COVEN VIG Wo 555k See A E E E A E E E TT 1 1 Product Oveni W zessan ia ea E E E 1 2 Designiofthe TP 177A HMI Device sisesssnisssssassns ainneoin k iana K Aaaa aaa N a AN a a
206. ect is reversible Therefore activate the screen saver When the screen saver is active the backlighting is also reduced If you set the screen saver Blank Screen the backlighting is switched off completely TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 158 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System Requirements Procedure Result 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 You have opened the Screensaver dialog with the ScreenSaver Dim Backlight becomes active after E LY minutes l Screensaver becomes active after Jo w minutes 2 Standard Blank Screen l Enter a 0 to disable the Function The minimum time is 5 and the maximum is 71582 minutes Time interval in minutes until backlighting is reduced Period of time in minutes before the screen saver is activated Radio buttons for the screensaver Proceed as follows 1 Enter the interval in minutes after which the backlighting is to be reduced Entering 0 will deactivate the backlighting reduction 2 Enter the number of minutes before the screen saver is to be activated The minimum time is 5 minutes and the maximum time is 71582 minutes Entering 0 disables the screen saver 3 Select either the screen saver or an empty screen If you want the screen saver to function activate the Standard radio button If you do not want the scre
207. ed at both ends and grounded at different system parts Potential differences may develop when a system is connected to different mains General Requirements for Equipotential Bonding Potential differences must be reduced by means of equipotential bonding in order to ensure trouble free operation of the relevant components of the electronic system The following must therefore be observed when installing the equipotential bonding circuit e The effectiveness of equipotential bonding increases as the impedance of the equipotential bonding conductor decreases or as its cross section increases e If two system parts are connected to each other via shielded data lines with shielding connected to the grounding protective conductor on both sides the impedance of the additionally installed equipotential bonding cables may not exceed 10 of the shielding impedance e The cross section of a selected equipotential bonding conductor must be capable of handling the maximum equalizing current The best results for equipotential bonding between two cabinets were achieved with a minimum conductor cross section of 16 mm2 e Use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanized steel Establish a large surface contact between the equipotential bonding conductors and the grounding protective conductor and protect these from corrosion e Terminate the shielding of the data cable on the HMI device flush and near the equipotential busbar using suit
208. edia card can no longer be used If you format a MultiMedia card for the SIMATIC S7 in the HMI device this MultiMedia card can no longer be used in the SIMATIC S7 Only use MultiMedia cards that are approved for the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 73 Operator Controls and Displays 5 2 Connecting a memory card to the TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Procedure Inserting a memory card Proceed as follows 1 2 Insert the memory card into the relevant slot When inserting the memory card please note that it can only be inserted in the slot when the front side of the memory card is visible The following figure shows you how to insert the memory card for example in the TP 177B 6 1 Memory card interlock 2 Memory card 3 Memory card slot Check that the memory card is properly seated If the memory card is inserted correctly in the memory card slot the memory card lock engages behind the memory card Using a memory card for the first time 74 NOTICE Data loss When requested by the HMI device to format a memory card for first time use you should save a backup copy of memory card data to a PC Proceed as follows to prevent data loss 1 Cancel the formatting procedure by pressing ESC 2 Save a backup copy of vital data to a PC 3 4 If you require on the HMI device data that has been saved on the PC
209. ediately It is then no longer possible to call the loader after switching on the HMI device In this case an HMI device with the function End project would have to be configured Valid value range is 0 s to 60 s 5 Close the dialog and save your entries with OK Touch x to discard the entries TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 84 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A Result The regional settings for the HMI device screen have now been changed Screen orientation The orientation of the screen has already been configured by the configuration engineer when setting up the project When transferring the project to the HMI device a suitable orientation of the screen is set automatically NOTICE When a project is available on the HMI device do not change the screen orientation afterwards You can for example change the orientation of the screen in the Control Panel if you need to operate the loader on a vertically mounted HMI device without a project TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 85 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A 6 1 2 3 Displaying Information about the HMI Device Requirement KC The OP Properties dialog has been opened with the OP DA icon Procedure Proceed as
210. eeaeenee 230 SNIN OVEVIEW ira sac raen e ae EEE aea E EE A e EEES E E 230 8 1 3 2 Entering and Editing Numerical Values sssessissnniiiraniidinieinin aniani raana aaa a 231 8 1 3 3 Entering and Editing Alphanumerical Values ccc ceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenaeeeeeecaeeeseaeeeesenaeeeeeaaes 233 8 1 3 4 Entering and Editing Symbolic Values ee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeeeaeeeeeees 235 8 1 3 5 Entering and Modifying the Date and Time ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeseeaeeeeeeeeerteees 236 8 19 67 VIEWIMNIMOTEXT sirean n E E E e EE 236 8 1 4 Project SOCUINY joss csdectieed ec cbieeidleaeded teddanec EEEE EEEE 237 SLAT SOVGIVIGW esini e uses he A a eee i ee eters 237 OVA 2 USER IOGOM A T baie E ene taeea di balevsgitecenseetweverin wee aisrneden tes 239 8 1 4 3 User logoff sorsien nianiar ankin Soscsnkt cocesendecaseqde lt Feiinn snhbedp edenisersnnessedeltacyiiecesbieee 240 BAA Create USEN coica E e EEE e Aa EEAS E REEE EaR Ea 241 8 1 4 5 Changing user dala seccineieieiie suiii rinrin ierni EA E N ATE AE EET ETENEE 242 0 1 46 Del tinga USCL urri aa a a e e ee i ee ta Sete coheed 243 8 1 5 CIOSING the proja baeri nain na a AA EAA ven Rea 244 8 1 6 Operating the Trend ViGW nics lt tcciec ti denen apnsadene sttgecssesrascadeeeaeastagensntngendeadnenmenstdedenntescrecdeoteel 244 8 161 OVGINIGW imines e EA a tutes taesas E a O E EE 244 8 1 6 2 Operating the Trend VioWeicccnserssersi
211. eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeseneeeeseneaeeeteeneees 12 2 Dimension drawings of the TP 177A and TP 177B 6 ooo eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeneeeeenaees 12 3 Dimension Drawings of the OP 177B 0 eecceceecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeseneaeeseneeeeeseeeeeesenaeeseeeaeees 12 4 Specifications of the TP 177A nresnain a aaia saa canaghagacdecabaaas sad dea dEi aAA 12 5 Technical specifications of the TP 177B 4 ccecsececeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeesesaeceeeeeeeseeisaeeeeeeeeetnaeess 12 6 Technical specifications of the TP 177B 6 c ccscceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeesecieaeeeeeeeeeteaees 12 7 Specifications of the OP 177B cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeae cece eeeeecaeaeeeeeseeceaeaeceeeesecenaeeeeeeeetsneiaeneee 12 8 Description of the Interfaces ccccccceeeseceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeseaaeaeeeeeeeececaeeeeeeesesacaeeecenaeess x 12 8 1 JPOWOR SUPPIV scssencceree es scerectacs tanaatiecereeievanveundiaspnancedyanananae dea E AE E E k 1282 XIF 1B RS 422 RS 485 jinni niar EEE A E EA NR k 128 3 X20 USB eiri A E R AAEE N 12 84 KIHPROFINET essenin S AAEE ERA ENA SAE SENE EAERI PDD OMG lh OENES PEPEE A E EE A E E E ETE A 1 ESD GUIGCIINGS wars iiiecssaiisden ideacessnidlacesaniee a a a e a a a a A 2 SYStOM AaS nosse a S A E EA E tinea rtademlaal rind ADDIOVIATIONS ke a a iat nade bites a es ead edd eee ia dats Era E GIOSSANY osier aaa adi che ahaa iad i eee ha we ened Leeds Mi ne Nigh eddie Le ING
212. eeeenaees 214 7 5 4 Updating the operating system USING PrOSAVE eee eee eeeeteeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeetenaeeeeeenaees 215 7 5 5 Resetting to factory settings with WinCC flexible eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeaeeeseeaeees 216 7 5 6 Resetting to factory settings With ProSave 0 0 cceeeeeceenneeeeecneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeesesaeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeees 2 7 6 Installing and Removing OPtions cece ceeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaaeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeensaneeaes 221 7 6 1 OVEIVIEW eesi deca E ae DO siege ecu Aida tans bat chaste sated eane e R EE 221 7 6 2 Installing and Removing Options using WinCC flexible 221 7 6 3 Installing and removing options USING PrOSAVE eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee erences eetaeeeettaeeeeeenaeeeeeas 2 7 7 Transfering License Keys and Transfering Them Back ccccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeenaeeeeeenteeeeeaas 224 7 7 1 WOW CI WIGW fei xis ata care en E E t Peetu cata ted S E axe vead ca ty cache ea A 224 7 7 2 Transferring and transferring back license keys ccccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeesaaes 225 Operating a Projet ss iscsi iina sunaa calves a E RE Ke ai Eea aa eA aeaaea 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 17TA sesno AA 227 8 1 1 OVGRVIGW casia Aiea Ne Sele dei Ee ate ieee 227 8 1 2 Setting the Project LANQuage sereset aa a ESS AE R SEA eee 229 8 1 3 Entries and Help within a Project ccccccccscccecssecseeeecneceeceeeseeecessaseseeneeneensececeeseee
213. election list with the and x buttons 2 Select an entry in the selection list Touch an entry to select it This is then taken by the controller Result You have changed the symbolic value or entered a new one 8 2 5 6 Entering the Date and Time Entering the date and time Enter the date and time in the same way you enter alphanumerical values Note When entering the date and time please note that the format is determined by the configured project language See also Setting the project language Page 250 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 258 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 5 7 Viewing Infotext Purpose The configuration engineer uses infotext to provide additional information and operating instructions with respect to screens and operable screen objects Infotext can provide information on the value to be entered in an IO field for example Enter temperature setpoint for Tank_1 Range 40 80 C Infotext for Input Objects Touch the lf key on the screen keyboard This key is only enabled if infotext or the current screen has been configured for the input object Note Switching between displayed infotexts If infotext has been configured for an IO field and a screen touching the infotext window toggles between the two Infotext for Other Operator Controls Infotext can also
214. em function ExportDataRecords when the parameter Overwrite is set to No An attempt has been made to save a recipe under a file name which already exists The export is canceled 290064 Message reporting that the deletion of data records has started 290065 Message reporting that the deletion of data records has successfully completed 290066 Confirmation request before deleting data records 290068 Security request to confirm if all data records in the recipe should be deleted 290069 Security request to confirm if all data records in the recipe should be deleted 290070 The data record specified is not in the import file Check the source of the data record number or data record name constant or tag value 290071 During the editing of data record values a value was entered which exceeded the low limit of the recipe tag The entry is discarded Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag 290072 290073 When editing data record values a value was entered which exceeds the high limit of the recipe tag The entry is discarded An action e g saving a data record failed due to an unknown error The error corresponds to the status alarm IDS_OUT_CMD_EXE_ERR in the large recipe view Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag 290074 While saving it was detected that a data record with the specified number already exists but under
215. en CAUTION Installing and removing the protective foil Always shut down the HMI device before installing the protective foil You might otherwise trigger unintended functions This also applies when removing the protective foil Never use sharp or pointed tools such as a knife to remove the protective foil This may damage the touch screen TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 318 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Maintenance and care 11 1 Maintenance and Service 11 1 4 Protective covers on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6 Protective cover The cover protects the front of the TP 177A and TP 177B 6 The cover protects the display and the frame of the HMI device from dirt scratches and chemicals This allows the HMI devices to also be used in environments with a higher level of harmful substances When the cover is used the protective class NEMA4 is achieved The following figure shows the components of protective cover Frame Protective cover Base frame TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 319 Maintenance and care 11 1 Maintenance and Service The figure below shows the HMI device with installed protective cover Eyelet for securing a touch screen pen Touch screen of the HMI device Protective cover Note Custom designs of the front using the protective cover The front of the HMI de
216. en Possible causes Check if e The cable is defective e the cable is plugged in e The PLC does not respond is defective etc e the controller is OK e The wrong port is used for the connection e the correct port is used e System overload Restart the system if the system alarm persists 280002 The connection used requires a function block in the controller The function block has responded Communication is now enabled 280003 The connection used requires a function block in Check if the controller e the cable is plugged in The function block has not responded e the controller is OK e the correct port is used Restart the system if the system alarm persists Remedy depends on the error code 1 The function block must set the COM bit in the response container 2 The function block must not set the ERROR bit in the response container 3 The function block must respond within the specified time timeout 4 Go online to the PLC 280004 The connection to the controller is interrupted Check the connection parameters in WinCC flexible There is no data exchange at present Ensure that the cable is plugged in the controller is operational the correct interface is being used Restart the system if the system alarm persists 290000 The recipe tag could not be read or written It is Check in the configuration that the address has been set assigned the start value up in the controller The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for
217. en saver to function activate the Blank Screen radio button With this setting the backlighting of the HMI device is switched off completely if the set interval for activating the screen saver expires 4 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The screen saver and the reduced backlighting for the HMI device is set TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 159 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 6 6 Changing the printer properties Introduction Requirements 160 The HMI device can print on local printers or network printers You can print hardcopies and reports on a network printer Line printing of alarms is not possible on a network printer The listo etti HM i an be found on the Internet under http rere re oe siemens comiWWiview en 4 1376409 gt You have opened the Printer Properties dialog with the Printer ie icon Printer Properties OK Printer Language Pe Inkjet O Port _ o Network et o Paper Size Jas E o Orientation _ Portrait o o e Landscape CMY i _ Draft Mode M Color C Selection list for the printer Selection list for the interface Network address of the printer Paper format selection list Orientation group with radio buttons for print orientation Check box to improve the color quality only for Brother
218. ent Ki The OP Properties dialog has been opened with the OP DA icon Procedure Proceed as follows 1 From the OP Properties dialog select the Display tab OP Properties Display Device Touch License ct men UP DOAN aa OPortrait Startup Delay _ 1 Delay time 3 sec Button for increasing the contrast Orientation 1 3 Landscape Button for reducing the contrast Setting the orientation of the screen OOO Input field for the startup delay on the HMI device 2 The buttons UP and DOWN are located in the Contrast group Proceed as follows to change contrast of the screen Touch the UP button to increase the contrast of the screen Touch the DOWN button to decrease the contrast of the screen 3 The radio buttons Landscape and Portrait are located in the Orientation group Proceed as follows to change the orientation of the screen Enable the Landscape radio button to orientate the screen of the HMI device diagonally Enable the Portrait radio button to orientate the screen of the HMI device vertically 4 In the input field Delay time which is located in the Startup Delay group set the delay time for the startup of the HMI device The delay time is the time in seconds that is waited from the appearance of the loader until the start of the project With the value 0 the project starts imm
219. er Enter the value again Use the and gt keys to move the cursor within the current value You can now edit the characters of the current value or add characters Use the PSF key to delete the character to the left of the cursor You can quickly switch between screen keyboard level using he snn key When you toggle the level the key labels on the screen keyboard change Select P li view the infotext of the IO field This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the IO field or for the screen which contains the IO field 3 Select 4 to confirm your entries or cancel them with Ss Both actions close the screen keyboard You have changed the alphanumerical value or entered a new one TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A 8 1 3 4 Entering and Editing Symbolic Values Symbolic Screen Keyboard When you touch a symbolic IO field on the HMI touch screen the symbolic screen keyboard appears The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete One Two Three Four the MA ESE Help The display of the screen keyboard with a vertical mounting of the HMI device slightly differentiates from the figure above Procedure Enter the symbolic values using the symbolic screen keyboard Proceed as follows 1 Touch the required symbolic IO field on the screen Th
220. ernet Settings dialog has been opened with the WinCC Internet Settings ay icon Procedure Changing E mail Settings Proceed as follows 1 Select the Email tab WinCC flexible Internet Settings OK Email l Proxy SMTP server Use the default of the project file OQ a Sender simatic HMI Device m 2 Authentication il 5 Setting for the SMTP server Name for the sender E mail account 2 Specify the SMTP server Activate the check box Use the default of the project file if you want to use the SMTP server permanently configured in the project Deactivate the check box Use the default of the project file if you do not want to use the SMTP server permanently configured in the project Touch the input field to enter the SMTP server The screen keyboard is displayed 3 Enter the name for the sender in the Sender input field Touch the input field The screen keyboard is displayed 4 Enter the e mail account for your e mail in the Authentication input field Touch the input field The screen keyboard is displayed Some e mail providers only allow you to send mail if you specify the e mail account The Authentication input field can remain empty if your e mail provider allows you to send mail without checking the account TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 136 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configur
221. everal external memories with data backups are plugged in the data cannot be restored Remove the external memory with the data backups not needed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Select RESTORE to start restore The HMI device checks the external memory The HMI device issues messages in the following situations The external memory is not available or is defective Acknowledge the displayed messages The Control Panel is displayed again Replace the external memory More than one external memory with valid backup is available Remove all external memories with backups that are not needed If necessary you can check the available external memories using the REFRESH button 2 If necessary start the restore process with the RESTORE button The data to be restored is checked When the check is complete one of the following prompts is displayed You are starting RESTORE now All files except files on storage cards and the registry will be erased Are you sure At this point you can cancel the restore using the No button to prevent the data on the HMI device from being deleted You are now starting RESTORE All files on the panel and the licenses listed below as well as the registry will be erased Are you sure Thi
222. evice select the menu command Save The values were read from the PLC displayed on the HMI device and saved to the selected recipe data record Overview Page 308 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 313 Operating Recipes 10 7 Operating the Simple Recipe View 10 7 6 Transferring a Recipe Data Record to the PLC Introduction In order for an edited recipe data record to take effect in the process you must transfer the values to the PLC The displayed values in the recipe view are always transferred to the PLC TP 177A With the TP 177A HMI device the To PLC menu command can also be configured for the data record list In this case you can also select the To PLC menu command in the data record list Requirement A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe list contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the element list of the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to the PLC 3 Open the menu 4 Select the menu command To PLC Result The values of the recipe data record were transferred to the PLC and take effect in the process See also Overview TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 314 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 8 Exporting Recipe Data Records on the TP
223. f the HMI device is damaged NOTICE Loss of license keys The license keys on the HMI device will be deleted when resetting to factory settings The license keys on the HMI device will be retained when updating the operating system without resetting to factory settings NOTICE Data channels When resetting to factory settings all data channel parameters are reset The transfer can only be started following reconfiguration of the data channels TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 213 Commissioning a project 7 5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4 7 5 3 Updating the operating system using WinCC flexible Requirements e No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible e The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC e The data channel is configured on the HMI device Proceed as follows On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command from the Projekt gt Transfer menu in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens Select the type of HMI device Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC Set the connection parameters Close the dialog with OK In WinCC flexible select the command OS Update from the Projekt gt Transfer menu In Image path select the HMI device image file img The HMI device image files are availab
224. follows 1 Open the OP Properties dialog and select the Device tab OP Properties Display Device Touch License Device TP 177A a O Flashsize 4MB 2 Bootloader 12 Boot Rel Date 1970 01 01 O image 01 02 00 00_01 01 6 HMI device name Size of the internal flash memory in which the HMI device image and project are stored Version of the boot loader Boot loader release date O00 Version of the HMI device image 2 The Device tab displays the HMI device specific information and is read only You will need this information if you contact A amp D Technical Support 3 Use OK or X to close the dialog when the information is no longer required Note The size of the internal flash memory does not correspond to the available working memory for a project TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 86 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A 6 1 2 4 Calibrating the Touch Screen Introduction Depending on the mounting position and viewing angle it is possible that parallax may occur when operating the HMI device In order to prevent any operating errors as a result calibrate the touch screen again in the startup phase or during runtime Requirement The OP Properties dialog has been opened with the OP ie icon Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Open the OP Properties dialog then
225. formation to the Flash memory e Save files in a temporary folder to the Flash memory Saving to the Flash memory allows you to automatically restore the file system on the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 109 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Requirement Procedure Result 110 The OP Properties dialog has been opened with the OP ie icon ersistent Storage l Display Device Touch Save actual registry settings to Flash System will start with saved registry Save Registry mO settings next time Cy Save all files from temporary memory ia e g the Program files directory to Save Files flash The files will be restored during system startup The Temp directory will not be saved O Automatically repair File system errors on storage C we at system startup and card insertion time O Ee a Saves the current registry information to the flash memory The HMI device loads the saved registry information the next time it boots Button for saving registry information Button for saving temporary files 0O00 oO Saves all the files in temporary storage to the flash memory for example from the Program Files directory These files are written back the next time the HMI device starts The Temp directory is not saved Check box fo
226. g the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A General information NOTICE Transfer mode using MPI PROFIBUS DP The bus parameters for MPI PROFIBUS DP transfer e g the MPI PROFIBUS DP address of the HMI device will be read from the project currently loaded on the HMI device You can change the settings for MPI PROFIBUS DP transfer To do this you must first end the project and then change the settings on the HMI device Then return to transfer mode The HMI device uses the new MPI PROFIBUS DP settings until you transfer another project to it During the transfer of a project to the HMI device the MPI PROFIBUS DP settings will be overwritten with the values from the transferred project You can thus edit the MPI DP settings for the TP 177A irrespective of the project settings Transfer settings A project can only be transferred from the configuration PC to the HMI device when at least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device Do not change the transfer settings if a project is running or the HMI device is in transfer mode 6 1 2 8 Setting the Screen Saver Introduction Requirement 92 You can set a period of time for automatic activation of the screen saver on the HMI device The screen saver is automatically activated if the HMI device is not operated within the specified period of time The screen saver switches off in the following cases
227. ge the logoff time and password for the Admin user You can only change the logoff time for the PLC_User This user entry is used for logging in via the PLC This procedure describes changing user data by the administrator or a user with user management permission Proceed as follows 1 In the user view touch the user whose user data you want to change The following dialog appears User Group Group 1 fone 2 Change the desired user data Touch the corresponding input field The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed 3 Touch the OK button The user data for the user is changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A 8 1 4 6 Deleting a user Requirements You delete users in the user view To display the user view switch to the screen that contains the user view To delete a user you must have user management permission Note The Admin and PLC_User users exist by default and cannot be deleted Procedure Deleting a user Proceed as follows 1 Touch the user entry that you want to delete in the user view The following dialog appears User Group Group 1 aus 2 Touch the User input field The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed 3 Touch the The existing user name is deleted from the screen keyboard 4 Touch
228. ght window displays the available license keys Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the HMI device in the left window The license keys are then transferred to the HMI device The license key is transferred from the storage location to the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 225 Commissioning a project 7 7 Transfering License Keys and Transfering Them Back Procedure for transferring a license key back Proceed as follows Result See also 226 1 2 N ODO on fF Switch to Transfer mode on the HMI device When transferring back using WinCC flexible Select the License Keys command in the menu Project gt Transfer The Automation License Manager opens When transferring back using the Automation License Manager Start the Automation License Manager via the Windows Start menu Inthe Automation License Manager select the command Connect HMI device in the menu Edit gt Connect target system The Connect Target System dialog opens Under Device Type select the appropriate HMI device type Select the type of connection from the Connection box Set the connection parameters Select OK The connection to the HMI device is established The connected HMI device is displayed in the left window of the Automation License Manager In the left window select the HMI device
229. guring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 20 Overview of Network Operation Introduction The HMI device with a PROFINET interface can be connected to a TCP IP network Connection to a TCP IP network can offer the following advantages e Printing via a network printer e Saving recipe records to a server e Exporting recipe records e Importing recipe records e Transferring a project e Backing up data These advantages are not available with a direct PC connection However peripherals connected to the PC can be used For example you can use a local printer for printing NOTICE The HMI device can only be used in TCP IP and PROFINET networks The HMI device only has client functionality in the PC network This means that users can access files of a subscriber with TCP IP server functionality from the HMI device via the network However it is not possible to access files on the HMI device via the network from a PC Note Information on communication using SIMATIC S7 via PROFINET is provided in the WinCC flexible Communication user manual Requirements Within a TCP IP or PROFINET network computers are addressed using network names These network names are translated from a DNS or WINS server to TCP IP and PROFINET addresses Direct addressing via TCP IP and PROFINET addresses is also supported by the operating system This is why a DNS or WINS se
230. h screen as this may damage the plastic membrane of the touch screen Operation Feedback The HMI provides optical feedback when it detects that an operator control has been touched This feedback is independent of any communication with the PLC Therefore this feedback does not indicate whether the relevant action is actually executed or not The configuration engineer may also have configured the feedback function in a different manner Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 227 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A Optical Operation Feedback The type of optical feedback depends on the operator control object e Buttons The HMI outputs different views of the Touched and Untouched states provided the configuration engineer has configured a 3D effect Touched state Untouched state The configuration engineer defines the appearance of a selected field for example its line width and color for the focus e Invisible buttons The focus for invisible buttons is not identified after selection by default No optical operation feedback is provided in this case The configuration engineer may however configure invisible buttons so that their outline appears as lines when touched This outline remains visible until the you select another operator c
231. he SecureMode If the HMI device is protected the label secure mode will be displayed on the Windows CE desktop For more information refer to SecureMode in section Setting up and disabling SecureMode Page 140 The Transfer and Start buttons can always be operated without a password entry Password protection prevents maloperation This in turn increases security on the plant or machine The settings for the active project can only be changed by entering the password NOTICE Password not available If the password is no longer available you can execute the following once you have first reset the computer to factory settings e Change settings in the Control Panel e Operating the Windows CE taskbar All data on the HMI device will be deleted when you update the operating system Therefore use the password to protect against loss TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 139 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 2 Setting up and disabling SecureMode Overview You can use a password to protect the Control Panel against unauthorized access You can also protect the taskbar and the desktop with the aid of the SecureMode Function of SecureMode You set up the SecureMode by setting up a password in the Control Panel The SecureMode is then automatically activated The label secure mode will be
232. he following states is indicated e The Transfer dialog is displayed e The Loader opens e A project is started Switching off the HMI Device You have the following options for switching off the HMI device Shut down the power supply e Disconnect the plug in terminal strip on the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 69 Installation and connection 4 4 Switching on and Testing the HMI Device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 70 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operator Controls and Displays 5 5 1 Front side Operator Controls Operating elements on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6 gt SIEMENS Display with touch screen TP 177B 4 operating elements nO Pirro Display with touch screen Function keys without LED TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 71 Operator Controls and Displays 5 1 Front side Operator Controls Operating elements on the OP 177B SIMATIC PANEL Display with touch screen Function keys with LED Function keys without LED Touch screen The standard input unit on the HMI device is the touch screen All operator controls required for operation are displayed on the touch screen once the HMI device has started CAUTION Damage to the touch screen Pointed or sharp objects can damag
233. he process control phase Configuration phase Configuration PC es Test the project Simulate the project HMI device dependent Save the project T Transfer the project Process control phase HMI device Operate the project Connection to the PLC PLC TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 193 Commissioning a project 7 1 Overview Transferring the project to the HMI device To transfer a project to an HMI device the following procedures can be selected e Transfer from the configuration PC e Restore from a PC using ProSave In this case an archived project is transferred from a PC to the HMI device The configuration software need not be installed on this PC e On the TP 177B and OP 177B Restoring from an external storage device These procedures can be selected both during the initial startup as well as in the recommissioning of a project Initial startup and recommissioning e When the HMI device is initially started up there is no project at first The HMI device is also in this state after the operating system has been updated e When recommissioning any project already on the HMI device is replaced See also Transfer Backup and Restore using WinCC flexible Backup and Restore using ProSave Page 206 Backup and Restore Using a Memory Card Restoring from external storage device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 194 Operating Instructi
234. he values are read from the PLC 4 If you want to store the displayed values in the HMI device touch the a button Result The values were read from the PLC displayed on the HMI device and saved to the selected recipe data record See also Overview Page 300 Recipes in the Project Page 294 Recipe Values in the HMI Device and the PLC Page 299 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 306 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View 10 6 7 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC Introduction Requirements Procedure Result See also In order for an edited recipe data record to take effect in the process you must transfer the values to the PLC The display values in the recipe view are always transferred to the PLC A screen with a recipe view is displayed Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to the PLC 3 Touch The display values in the recipe view were transferred to the PLC and take effect in the process Overview Page 300 Recipes in the Project Page 294 Recipe Values in the HMI Device and the PLC Page 299 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 307 Operating Recipes 10 7 Operating the Simpl
235. hen the HMI device is turned on The MAC address is displayed in the PROFINET dialog in the Control Panel Procedure Setting the PC interface 1 2 3 Select Start gt Control Panel gt Set PG PC interface on the configuration PC Select S7ONLINE STEP7 gt TCP IP from the Application access point area Select the interface which is connected to the HMI device from the Interface parameterization used area Confirm your entries Procedure Restoring factory settings Proceed as follows 1 216 On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens Select the HMI device type from the General tab and select Ethernet from the Connection area Enter an IP address Note Possible address conflicts with incorrect IP address Do not use a dynamic IP configuration for Reset to factory settings Specify a unique IP address in which the configuration PC is located For the duration of the update process the HMI device is automatically assigned to the specified address If the HMI device has already been used with WinCC flexible or ProSave you can use the existing IP address for Reset to factory settings TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 5 Updating the operating system on the
236. horized access Without a password you can still read the settings in the Control Panel but you cannot change all the settings This prevents inadvertent operations and increases security for the plant or machine because the settings cannot be changed when a project is not open NOTICE If the password is no longer available you cannot change settings in the Control Panel and taskbar unless you update the operating system All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system Switching on and Testing the HMI Device Page 68 Changing the Password Settings Page 89 Configuring the Data Channel Page 93 Control Panel Overview Control Panel of the HMI Device The HMI device Control Panel can be used to modify the following HMI device settings e Screen settings e Transfer settings Opening the Control Panel 82 Open the Control Panel using the HMI device Loader The following options are available to open the Loader e The Loader appears briefly after starting the HMI device e During runtime If configured touch the relevant operator control object to stop the project The Loader opens Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A Touch the Co
237. ialog closes Result The logon information has now been set TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 183 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 11 5 Changing e mail settings Requirements Procedure Result 184 You have opened the WinCC flexible Internet Settings dialog with the amp WinCC Internet Settings icon WinCC flexible Internet Settings OK a Email SMTP server a Use the default of the project file Name SS Sender O Authentication 3 Setting the SMTP server Name for the sender E mail account Note Additional tabs may appear in the WinCC flexible Internet Settings dialog This depends on the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project Proceed as follows 1 Specify the SMTP server Activate the Use the default of the project file radio button if you want to use the SMTP server configured in the project Deactivate the Use the default of the project file radio button if you do not want to use the SMTP server configured in the project Specify the required SMTP server 2 Enter the name for the sender in the Sender text box 3 Enter the e mail account for your e mail in the Authentication text box Some e mail providers only allow you to send mail if you specify the e mail account
238. iew Options You can install options on for the HMI device for example additional programs developed especially for the HMI device You can also remove options from the HMI device Note A license key may be need to run an option The license key unlocks the option for use 7 6 2 Installing and Removing Options using WinCC flexible Requirements The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC No project is open in WinCC flexible The data channel is configured on the HMI device Procedure for installing an option Proceed as follows 1 On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens 2 Select the type of HMI device oO N OOA Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC then set the connection parameters Close the dialog with OK Select the Options command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible Select the desired option under Available options Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when the installation of an option is initiated Start the installation of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC with the gt gt button Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible A status display appears indicating the
239. igured can be assigned data on the HMI device and is then referred to as a data record The use of recipes ensures that when a data record is downloaded all the assigned data is transferred synchronously to the controller TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 368 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Glossary Runtime software is a process visualization software which can be used to test a project on a configuration computer Also refer to Project and Engineering software Screen object Configured object for operating and monitoring the system e g a rectangle an IO field or a recipe view Source file File from which various project files can be created depending on the configuration The source file is not transferred and remains on the configuration computer The file name extension of a source file is hmi Refer to Source file compressed and Project file Source file compressed Compressed form of the source file Can be transferred in addition to the project file to the corresponding HMI device Enable Backtransfer must be set in the project on the configuration computer The file extension of a compressed source file is pdz The standard memory location for a compressed source file is the external MMC Refer to Source file To restore a source file it is necessary to use the same WinCC flexible version which was used to configure the project STEP 7 Programming software SIMATIC S7
240. in the simple Alarm view or Alarm view If configured the infotext assigned to this alarm is displayed 3 Close the infotext window with K TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 287 Operating Alarms 9 2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B Alarm indicator The alarm indicator is a graphic symbol that shows current errors or errors that need to be acknowledged depending on the configuration 3 The alarm indicator flashes as long as alarms are queued for acknowledgment The number indicates the number of queued alarms The configuration engineer can assign functions to be executed when the alarm indicator is operated Usually the alarm indicator is only used for error alarms Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there 9 2 3 Acknowledging Alarms Requirements Procedure Result See also 288 e The alarm which is to be acknowledged is displayed in the Alarm window or in the Alarm view e Either the Alarm window or the Alarm view is enabled e The alarm must be acknowledged Proceed as follows 1 Select the alarm by touching it in the Alarm view or Alarm window 2 Touch the button in the simple Alarm view or Ld in the advanced Alarm view A soft key can also be configured to acknowledge alarms The alarm or all alarms of the corresponding acknowledgement gro
241. inCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 141 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 3 2 Opening the Control Panel Introduction The HMI device Control Panel can be opened as follows e Independently of a running project Press the Control panel button in the loader By calling up from the Windows CE start menu e With active project An operating element must be configured to open the Control Panelfor this purpose Procedure open the Control Panel via the Start menu Proceed as follows 1 Open the Windows CE start menu Alternatively press the key twice on the alphanumerical screen keyboard 2 Select Settings gt Control panel Result The control panel is opened 6 3 3 3 Reference for functions Overview of functions The following table shows the settings in the Control Panel Icon Function Tab entry Saving and restoring with external storage device Importing displaying and deleting certificates Stores Setting the date and time Date Time Configuring the screen keyboard 7 2 Setting the character repeat for the keyboard Repeat Setting the double click Double Click TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 142 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4
242. ing System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 3 Select either automatic address assignment via DHCP or manual address assignment 4 If you set the address yourself use the screen keyboard and enter the respective addresses in the input fields for IP Address Subnet Mask and if used Default Gateway 5 If a name server DNS is used in the network open the Name Server tab The Name Servers tab of the Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver dialog is displayed Onboard LAN Ethernet Dr 04 EY IP Address Name Servers Name server addresses Primary DNS are Secondary DNS ig a Primary WINS Do ras Secondary WINS Lonn cal 6 Enter the respective addresses in the input fields using the screen keyboard 7 Close the dialog and save your entries with ok Touch x to discard the entries Once you have applied the settings you are prompted to reboot the HMI device 8 When prompted open the Device tab of the OP Properties dialog and reboot the HMI device Result The network parameters for the HMI device have now been set See also Displaying Information about the HMI Device Page 112 Overview of Network Operation Page 129 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 134 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 24 Changing the Logon Information
243. ing the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Procedure changing proxy settings Proceed as follows 1 Select the Proxy tab WinCC flexible Internet Settings Email Proxy jj Use proxy server Proxy Port _ pa 2 Check box for using a proxy server Address of the proxy server Port 2 Activate the check box Use proxy server if you want to use a proxy server 3 If you use a proxy server Specify the address of the proxy server and the desired port Touch the corresponding input field The screen keyboard is displayed 4 Close the dialog and save your entries with OR Touch X to discard the entries Result The Internet settings have been changed Note Options Additional tabs may appear in the WinCC Internet Settings tab This depends on the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic See also Overview of Network Operation Page 129 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 137 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 1 Loader Overview The figure below shows the Loader The header line contains details of the loader version These details are not shown in the following figure
244. ion GIE 166 DNS Sona DNS server 129 Documentation Enclosed Domain Element list E Mail Setting 1 143 184 Emission 33 Enhanced Recipe View 296 Entering symbolic values Symbolic values Text box Equipotential bonding Connecting 5 Wiring diagram Equipotential Bondin Requirements Equipotential bonding cable Error alarm Acknowledging 282 Ethernet settings IP address Exporting Recipe data record External Keyboard Mouse TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 F Factory setting With ProSave With WinCC flexible Feedback Optical File Backup Forcing a n in remote operation 266 Formats Front view ze 6 17 19 20 21 Function Additional Function keys Global function assignment Labeling 78 Local function assignment Function test G Gauge 260 H High frequency radiation 29 HMI device Bottom view 18 19 Cold restart Connecting 50 EMC compliant mountin 36 Front view 19 20 Information Initial startu Interfaces Mounting Mounting PS ee Bs Rear view 18 20 Raen IE Switching off Seti Testing 6 HMI device image 86 h12 HMI Input Panel Options 373 Index Identification 183 183 Importing Certificate Recipe data record 316 Info texts Information for the HMI device 164 Security Infotext Displaying 236 259 281 Initial startup
245. ion in STEP 7 e WinCC flexible Options Based on an example project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring the WinCC flexible Sm rtServices Sm rtAccess and OPC server options Online Availability Technical documentation on SIMATIC products and SIMATIC systems is available in PDF format in various languages at the following addresses NA J Do N qe Iecnnica mentation ttp www automation siemens com simatic portal html_OO techdoku htm TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 5 Preface Conventions Trademarks Configuration and runtime software differ with regard to their names as follows e WinCC flexible 2008 for example refers to the configuration software The term WinCC flexible is used in a general context The full name for example WinCC flexible 2008 is always used when it is necessary to differentiate between different versions of the configuration software e WinCC flexible Runtime refers to the runtime software that can run on HMI devices The name TP 177B is the umbrella term for the following HMI devices e TP 177B 4 e TP 177B 6 Text is highlighted as follows to simplify reading the operating instructions Notation Scope Add screen e Terms that appear in the user interface for example dialog names tabs buttons menu commands e Required input for example limits tag values e Path infor
246. ion on this may be available in your plant documentation User Groups and Permissions Project specific user groups are created by the configuration engineer The Administrators group is included in all projects by default User groups are assigned permissions The permission required for an operation is specifically defined for each individual object and function in the project Users Each user is assigned to exactly one user group Users can be created as follows e By the configuration engineer during configuration e By the administrator on the HMI device e By auser with user management permission on the HMI device Logoff Times A logoff time is configured in the system for each user If the time between any two user actions e g entering a value or changing screens exceeds this logoff time the user is automatically logged off The user must then log in again to continue to operate objects assigned password protection TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 269 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Passwords If an administrator or a user with administrator permission is logged on all users on the HMI device are displayed in the User view If a user without user management permission is logged on only the personal user entry is displayed The permissions of a user after logging in depends on the user group to the user is assigne
247. ion settings have been measured Tap the screen to register saved data Wait for 30 seconds to cancel saved data and keep the current setting Time limit 30 see 9 The new calibration values are measured Touch the touch screen to save the calibration values If you do not touch the screen within 30 seconds the new calibration values will be discarded Time remaining until the calibration values are discarded 4 Touch the screen within 30 seconds The new calibration is saved If you wait longer than 30 seconds the new calibration is discarded and the original calibration remains in effect 5 Close the dialog with OR The Control Panel is displayed Result The HMI device touch screen is now recalibrated TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 114 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 12 Changing the Password Settings Introduction You can protect the Control Panel and Windows CE taskbar with a password Requirement The Password Properties dialog has been opened with the Password A icon Password Properties Password Settings l Input field for the password Input field for repeating the password Procedure entering a password Proceed as follows 1 Enter a password in the Password input field Touch the input field The alphanumerical scree
248. ipe data records are exported from the HMI device recipe memory and are saved to a CSV file on the external storage medium The records can be reimported from the storage medium to the recipe memory TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes Data flow 10 3 Recipes in the Project The following figure shows the data flow in a project with recipes HMI device Recipe display Rece Recipe screen Controller External storage device S a Editing saving or deleting a recipe data record Display recipe data record Synchronize or do not synchronize recipe tags The recipe tags are always synchronized on the TP 177A Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen 00O display them in the recipe view TP 177B and OP 177B Recipe tags are to the PLC online or offline o0 0 storage medium TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Write records from the recipe view to the PLC or read records from the PLC and TP 177B and OP 177B Export or import recipe data records to an external 295 Operating Recipes 10 4 Displaying a Recipe 10 4 Displaying a Recipe Displaying Recipes You can display and edit recipes on the HMI device with a recipe view or recipe screen Recipe view A recipe view is a screen object used to manage recipe data records The recipe view show
249. isplayed values of the selected record are transferred from the HMI device to the PLC From PLC The recipe values from the PLC are displayed on the HMI device in the recipe view Display infotext The infotext configured for the simple recipe view is displayed e Element list Menu command Function Save The selected record is saved To PLC The displayed values of the selected record are transferred from the HMI device to the PLC From PLC The recipe values from the PLC are displayed on the HMI device in the recipe view Save as The data record is saved under the new name A dialog box opens in which the name is entered With the TP 177A HMI device the following menu commands can also be configured for the element list Display infotext The infotext configured for the simple recipe view is displayed Rename The selected record is renamed A dialog box opens in which the name is entered Back The data record list opens TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 309 Operating Recipes 10 7 Operating the Simple Recipe View Operating Menus Touch the desired menu command The command is executed Operating the Recipe Screen You operate the recipes in a recipe screen with the operator controls provided by the configuration engineer Additional information on this may be available in your plant documentation 10 7 2 Creating a Recipe Data Record
250. issan A E T then E a 259 8 2 6 Operating a GAUGe ciceccacedeeeceeeeeessaesectena seaencciaasseevenaeeet cna ceeed canes dt cnaeeedd caaevet EEEE E 260 8 2 7 USING SWIKCHOS sions vues sissaceched tend eisietadyebeanesd baad bn tiua Raxbeanaee dane siunddesiles rheateunaneene 261 8 2 8 SING Sliden isenimine ne e S EAE er A EE E EEA EAE OA E ES 262 8 2 9 Using the Status Force Display cceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseneeeeseeeeeeeseeaeeseeaeeaanees 263 8 2 10 Operating the SM rtClient Vie Wessani ae AEA Aa 265 8 211 Operating CMOS cele 4 e E E E he eed cde eee 267 8 2 A11 OV CRVIGW caniden Merrit arent valet vg dete det sald lhe Aa ea a A E a 267 8 2 11 2 Operating the Trend VIEW is ssigsrtiisiii atii e a aaa a a a aiaa aE NA a 268 8 2 12 Project SO CUNY pera ative cote dandvees ccetieaceciedaecacestaylacdicedasthfeeaifiesaensttdeavtitedaaseesanteactewsaendiaeenees 269 8 2 AZ AM OV GI VOW sss Biases otal asta cede was tus E E cpus sael nant teria anise ities A deci ete 269 9 2122 Sr LOGON iranin si leet eed aa ieee ace aide Merete naa 271 O22 1229 USEF LOGON E mele anadelys ener A vaendieia E nen iuaes ah 272 8 2 12 4 Creating a USEN ccee cs cceecsccsenten est diacesesonhtvecscusheanceshetiec eatderesnsisense end acdesbavanesteenesdnsesiondseetdutenaned 273 8 2 12 5 Changing User Data 0 2 eccccceeeneeeeeee eee eeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeaaeeeseeeaeeeeeaaeeesecaeeeseeaeeeseeeeeseeeeeenaeeeeeas 274 9 2 12 0 Deleting a USET osann
251. it belongs to another project or has already be archived 90030 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation perhaps due to a power failure 90031 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation perhaps due to a power failure 90032 Running out of space on the storage medium Make more space available by inserting an empty storage for log medium or swapping out the log files on the server using ExportLog 90033 No more space on the storage medium for log Make more space available by inserting an empty storage As of now no more operator actions requiring medium or swapping out the log files on the server using logging will be executed ExportLog 90040 Audit Trail is switched off because of a forced Activate the Audit Trail again using the system function user action StartLog 90041 A user action which has to be logged has been A user action requiring logging should only be possible executed without a logged on user with permission Change the configuration by setting a required permission for the input object 90044 A user action which has to be confirmed was Repeat the user action if necessary blocked because there is another user action pending 110000 The operating mode was changed Offline mode is now set 110001 The operating mode was changed Online mode is now set TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 344 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A
252. ith the menu command From PLC in the element list The values changed in the recipe view only take effect in the PLC when you transfer the edited data record to the PLC with the menu command To PLC Requirement A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed Proceed as follows If the recipe list contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record Open the data record list Select the recipe data record you want to change Open the element list Change the values of the records as required Save your changes with the menu command Save The recipe data record is saved The edited recipe data record has now been saved in the selected recipe Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 Result See also Overview Page 308 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 311 Operating Recipes 10 7 Operating the Simple Recipe View 10 7 4 Deleting a Recipe Data Record Introduction Requirement Procedure Result See also 312 You can delete all the data records which are not required A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed Proceed as follows 1 Oo op If the recipe list contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record Open the data record list Select the data record you want to delete Open the menu Select the menu command Delete The data
253. ither ignore this item in your project or e Install a certificate that has been signed with a root certificate known to the client computer The date of the certificate is invalid e Either ignore this item in your project or e Install a certificate with a valid date on the server Invalid CN Common Name or Computer Name e Either ignore this item in your project or e Install a certificate with a name that corresponds to that of the server address 230203 Although a connection can be made to the server Error 503 Service unavailable Check if the HTTP server refuses to connect because WinCC flexible Runtime is running on the server e WinCC flexible Runtime is not running on the the HTTP channel is supported server or e the HTTP channel is not supported 503 Service unavailable Other errors can only occur if the web server does not support the HTTP channel The language of the alarm text depends on the web server Data is not exchanged 230301 An internal error has occurred An English text explains the error in more detail This may be caused by insufficient memory OCX does not work 230302 The name of the remote server cannot be resolved Check the configured server address The attempt to connect failed Check if the DNS service is available on the network 230303 The remote server is not running on the addressed Check the configured server address computer Wrong server address The attempt to connect failed
254. k into recesses on the HMI device The overall HMI device dimensions are not exceeded by this a Hook Cross tip screw TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 42 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Planning Use 3 3 Preparing for Mounting Securing the TP 177B 4 Metal mounting clamps are provided for mounting The mounting clamps hook into recesses on the HMI device The overall HMI device dimensions are not exceeded by this D Threaded stud Hook 3 3 Preparing for Mounting Select the mounting location of the HMI device Points to observe when selecting the mounting location e Position the HMI device so that it is not subjected to direct sunlight e Position the HMI device such that it is ergonomically accessible for the user Choose a suitable mounting height e Ensure that the air vents of the HMI device are not covered as a result of the mounting e Observe the permissible mounting positions for the HMI device Degrees of protection The degrees of protection are only guaranteed when the following is observed for the mounting cut out e Material thickness at the mounting cut out for IP65 degree of protection 2 to 6 mm e Material thickness at the mounting cut out for NEMA 4X NEMA 12 degree of protection indoor use only 3 mm to 6 mm e Permitted deviation from plane at the mounting cut out lt 0 5 mm This condition must be fulfilled for the mounted HMI device
255. k that the mounting seal is fitted on the HMI device Do not install the mounting seal turned inside out This may cause leaks in the mounting cut out 2 Insert the HMI device into the mounting cut out from the front 3 Insert a mounting clamp into the intended recesses on the HMI device Example Inserting plastic mounting clamps Example Inserting metal mounting clamps on the TP 177A on the TP 177 4 4 Tighten the mounting clamp using a threaded stud or a cross tip screwdriver 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all mounting clamps 6 Check the fit of the mounting seal If necessary repeat steps 1 to 6 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 49 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device Result See also The HMI device is mounted and the relevant level of protection is ensured at the front Accessories Page 22 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device Requirement e The HMI device must be mounted according to the specifications of these operating ttp mall automation siemens com instructions Always use standard shielded cables Note Connector on the TP 177B 4 Use only straight connectors on the TP 177B 4 Angled connectors could conceal neighboring ports an find more information about this on the Internet at Connection sequence Connect the HMI device in the following sequence 1 2 Equipotential bonding Powe
256. keys It is not necessary to secure the labeling strip When mounting the HMI device ensure that the labeling strips do not become jammed between the mounting cut out and the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 79 Operator Controls and Displays 5 4 Labeling function keys on the TP 177B 4 and OP 177B 80 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A 6 1 1 Overview Loader The figure below shows the Loader It appears briefly when the HMI device starts up Loader Transfer Start Control Panel The Loader buttons have the following functions e Use the Transfer button to set Transfer mode on the HMI device e Press the Start button to open the project stored on the HMI device e Press Control Panel to open the HMI device Control Panel The Control Panel is used to configure various settings such as the transfer settings The loader also appears every time you close the project TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 81 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A Protecting the Control Panel with a password See also 6 1 2 6 1 2 1 You can protect the Control Panel and taskbar from unaut
257. l check box in the Channel 1 or Channel 2 group In the Channel 1 group the RS 422 RS 485 port is enabled for the serial data transfer The network port is enabled in the Channel 2 group 2 If you want to enable the automatic transfer activate the associated Remote Control check box 3 If you have enabled the data channel for Channel 2 select the log from the selection list 4 Enter further parameters if required Applies to MPI PROFIBUS S7 Ethernet Press the Advanced button to switch to the S7 Transfer Settings dialog box You can change the settings for MPI PROFIBUS S7 Ethernet there Confirm your entries The S7 Transfer Settings dialog box closes Applies to ETHERNET Use the Advanced button to change to Network amp Dial Up Connections Open the LAN9115 entry You can change the TCP IP settings there Confirm your entries Close Network amp Dial Up Connections Applies to USB No settings are needed for USB 5 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The data channel is configured TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 174 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 10 2 Changing MPI PROFIBUS DP settings Introduction The communication settings for MPI HMI device project 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 PROFIBUS DP and S7 Ethernet are defined i
258. l for Channel 1 If the Remote Control check box is activated during Online operating mode the X10 IF 1B port cannot be used for communication The Remote Control check box must be deactivated for Online operating mode Once the serial transfer is complete in the Channel 1 group you must therefore deactivate the Remote Control check box Transfer mode using Channel 2 When the project on the HMI device starts transfer parameters e g HMI device address for MPI PROFIBUS DP are overwritten with the values from the project You can change the settings for the transfer via Channel 2 The following steps are required e Close the project e Change the settings on the HMI device e Then return to Transfer mode The next time the project is started on the HMI device the settings will be overwritten by the values from the project Note If the HMI device is in Transfer mode while changes are made to the transfer settings the settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted This may occur if the Control Panel is opened to change the transfer properties in an active project TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 173 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If you want to enable a data channel activate the Enable Channe
259. le 316 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Maintenance and care 1 1 11 1 Maintenance and Service 11 1 1 Maintenance and care Introduction Requirements Procedure The HMI device is designed for maintenance free operation The touch screen and keyboard membrane should nevertheless be cleaned regularly Use a cleaning cloth dampened with a cleaning agent to clean the equipment Only use water with a little liquid soap or a screen cleaning foam NOTICE Unintentional response When cleaning the touch screen an unintentional response in the controller can be triggered by touching keys Switch the HMI device off before cleaning to prevent unintentional responses Damage caused by unauthorized cleaning products The HMI device may be damaged if compressed air steam jet air ejectors aggressive solvents or scouring powders are used for cleaning purposes Do not clean the HMI device with compressed air or steam jet blowers Do not use aggressive solvents or scouring powder Proceed as follows 1 Switch off the HMI device 2 Spray the cleaning solution onto a cleaning cloth Do not spray directly onto the HMI device 3 Clean the HMI device When cleaning the display wipe from the screen edge inwards TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 317 Maintenance and care 77 1 Maintenance and Service 11 1 2 Clean screen on the TP 177A an
260. le under WinCC flexible Images in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD In the output area you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image file after it is opened Switch into Transfer mode on the HMI device If you have activated automatic transfer mode for the HMI device the device automatically switches to Transfer mode when an update is initiated In WinCC flexible select Update OS on the configuring PC to run the operating system update Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Result 214 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 5 4 7 5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Updating the operating system using ProSave Requirements Procedure Result The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed The data channel is configured on the HMI device Proceed as follows On BR OO N gt From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC Select the HMI device type in the General tab Select the type of connection between the HMI device a
261. lexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD In the output area you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image file after it is opened When updating without reset to factory setting Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when an update is initiated Select Update OS on the PC to run the operating system update When updating with reset to factory setting only Switch on the power supply to the HMI device Follow the instructions in ProSave During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 211 Commissioning a project 7 5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4 7 5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4 7 5 1 Overview Updating the operating system A compatibility conflict may occur when transferring a project to the HMI device This is caused by different versions of the configuration software used and the HMI device image available on the HMI device If there are different versions the transfer is aborted A message indicating a compatibility conflict is displayed on the configuring PC
262. lows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the recipe data record you want to synchronize 3 Touch a The elements of the recipe data record are synchronized with the recipe tags If the values of the recipe view and the tag do not match the more current value is accepted Overview Page 300 Recipes in the Project Page 294 Recipe Values in the HMI Device and the PLC Page 299 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 305 Operating Recipes 10 6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View 10 6 6 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC Introduction In the current project the values which are also stored in the recipes in the HMI device can be changed directly in the plant This is the case for example if a valve was opened further directly at the plant than is stored in the recipe The values of the recipe data records saved in the HMI device possibly no longer match the values in the PLC To synchronize the recipe values read the values from the PLC and display them in the recipe view Requirements A screen with a recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values from the PLC 3 Touch al T
263. lt OVEGMWVIOW sseiyetevscdchen voted tedete need een ndiedhs sin vadacied anaes inden riatvesaeeees agian aneeee eater ads ieee anda 10 6 2 Creating a recipe data record oo eee eect eee neee ee eete eee eene ee ee teeeeneeeeeteeeetieeeeetieeessiieeaaeeeereea 10 6 3 Editing a recipe data record wiscc2icesseceecivacascveaacvacedecehasadevaneddeuvaasadvetaredviesases adasddesiadeesseaieseandececded 10 6 4 Deleting a recipe data reCOrd ccccceccecececesseeseceeevesceceeancecesneceeeeaeceeevanecesbanecerebanecertanedanscereiad 10 6 5 Synchronizing Tags on the TP 177B and OP 177B eee cececeeeee cette ee niaii 10 6 6 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC nsnssnssssisnrtintnsirinrnstntnntntnntnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnen nn nennen 306 10 6 7 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC sssssssiesesireserreserrsstirsstirrnsttrrnstnnnsttnnnnten nsten nna TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 13 Table of contents 11 12 14 10 7 Operating the Simple Recipe VieW i ssssnisssssii aniidae iaaa iaa K TOZA SOWGSIVIOW oiiro asenna a e Eaa a NE N AA i 10 7 2 Creating a Recipe Data Record 000 0 cece ceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeseecaeeeeeenaeessenneeaaes i 10 7 3 Editing a Recipe Data RECOrd 2 0 0 2 cc cecececcecceceececeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeseceaaaeeeeeesesenaaeaeeeeeesecenaeeeeeneeeeeeess k 10 7 4 Deleting a Recipe Data Record 0 ecceeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeee
264. m for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Procedure 1 Touch the Open Input Panel button The screen keyboard is displayed The Siemens HMI Input Panel Options dialog changes its appearance Siemens HMI Input Panel Options OK Ea Save current size and position Position and Size Currently open Close Input Panel Save L O Button for closing the screen keyboard Button for saving the screen keyboard 2 Touch the lt Num gt button of the screen keyboard two toggle between the numerical and alphanumerical screen keyboard Set the position of the screen keyboard 3 Touch the Save button to save the settings 4 Touch the Close Input Panel button to close the screen keyboard 5 Close the dialog with OK or X Result The screen keyboard settings have been modified See also Input Using the Screen Keyboard Page 100 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 102 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 4 Setting the Character Repeat for the Screen Keyboard Introduction In the Control Panel you can set the character repeat for the screen keyboard that is used to make entries outside an open project Requirement The Keyboard Properties dialog has been opened with the Keyboard E icon Repeat v cnable character repeat Repeat delay Long Short
265. mal values can be entered character by character via the buttons on the numerical screen keyboard Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired operating element within the screen The numerical screen keyboard opens The existing value is displayed in the screen keyboard and is selected 2 Enter the value You can only operate keys that are required for entering values The keys with letters cannot be used for example for entering a decimal value Which keys can be operated can be seen from the appearance of the keys You have the following options to enter a value The selected value is deleted when you enter the first character Completely reenter the value Use the lt and keys to move the cursor within the current value You can now edit or add to the characters of the current value Use the BSP key to delete the character to the left of the cursor If the value is selected use this key to delete the selected part of the value Change the sign of the value using the B key Use the Help key to display the infotext of the I O field This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the input object or the current screen 3 Use the key to confirm your entry or cancel it with ESC Either action closes the screen keyboard Result You have changed the numerical value or entered a new one TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 25
266. mation File gt Edit Operator actions for example menu commands shortcut menu commands lt F1 gt lt Alt P gt Keyboard operation Please observe notes labeled as follows Note Notes contain important information concerning the product its use or a specific section of the documentation to which you should pay particular attention Names labeled with a symbol are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG Other names used in this documentation may be trademarks the use of which by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner e HMI e SIMATIC e SIMATIC HMI e SIMATIC ProTool e SIMATIC WinCC e SIMATIC WinCC flexible e SIMATIC TP 177A e SIMATIC TP 177B e SIMATIC OP 177B TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Preface Representatives and offices If you have any further questions relating to the products described in this manual please contact your local representative at the SIEMENS branch nearest you You can locate your contact partner on this Internet URL http www siemens com automation partner Training Center Siemens AG offers a variety of training courses to familiarize you with automation systems Please contact your regional Training Center or the central Training Center in D90327 Nuremberg Phone 49 911 895 3200 Internet http www sitrain com T
267. n Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired operating element within the screen 2 Depending on the operating element perform further actions Detailed descriptions can be found under the respective operating element Examples I O field Enter numerical alphanumerical or symbolic values in the I O field Symbolic I O field Select an entry from the selection list Slider control Move the slider control Procedure for text boxes Values are entered in the project text boxes Based on your configuration the values are saved to tags and transferred for example to the PLC Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired text box within the screen The screen keyboard opens Depending on your configuration you can enter values in the text box in the following manner Numerical values for example decimal numbers hexadecimal numbers binary values Alphanumerical values for example digits and letters Date time 2 Enter the value 3 Confirm your entry with or discard your entry with the button Esa TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 251 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 5 2 Entering numerical values on the TP 177A TP 177B and OP 177B Numerical screen keyboard When you touch an operating element for numerical input on the HMI device touch screen the numerical screen keyboard appears This is the ca
268. n E EEE i TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 9 Table of contents 10 4 3 5 Connecting the Equipotential Bonding Circuit sss sssini eeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeees 4 3 6 Connecting the Power SUPPLY sce vesczcersiczees sir aa E EN SS A EE KAE A 4 3 7 Connecting uninterruptible power supply on the TP 177B 4 ooo eceeeeseccceceeeeeneeeeeeeeeetesecaeeeeees 58 4 3 8 Connecting the Controller oii i cicez sestears neecact aicecectenad E cxctigexthagiedeecetetanies 08 4 3 9 Connecting a configuration PC ee eecccceeneeeeeeeeenne eect eae eider enn ni OEE EE 4 3 10 Connecting USB devices to TP 177B and OP 177B ssssesesseeesserrsserrsserssrrrssrirrssrrnssrrrnsne 65 4 3 11 Connecting printers to TP 177B and OP 177B oe eecceeeeeeeeeeeene cece ene ee eeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeesenaeeeenaaes 4 4 Switching on and Testing the HMI Device eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeseneeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeees Operator Controls and Displays issc c cssetececsccsteescecdeceeedeccescseeelbbienusesdeenueile canssveuuasseushdvacdeteersatbbennaceaeueed 5 1 Frontside Operator Controls daera a a aa te a a a aaa aaa 5 2 Connecting a memory card to the TP 177B 6 and OP 177B ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeenaees 5 3 Insert a memory card in the TP 177B 4 cececeeececeece cece cece ceaeeeeeeeesecaaeaeeeseesenseaeeeeeeesesenaes 5 4 Labeling functi
269. n about internal states of the HMI device and PLC The overview below shows the causes of system alarms and how to eliminate the cause of error Depending on scope of functions only parts of the system alarms described in this section apply to the various HMI devices Note System alarms are only indicated if an alarm window was configured System alarms are output in the language currently set on your HMI device System Alarm Parameters System alarms may contain encrypted parameters which are relevant to troubleshooting because they provide a reference to the source code of the Runtime software These parameters are output after the text Error code TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 337 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Meaning of the System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 10000 The print job could not be started or was canceled Check the printer settings cable connections and the due to an unknown error Faulty printer setup power supply Or No permission is available for accessing the Set up the printer once again Obtain a network printer network printer authorization Power supply failure during data transfer If the error persists contact the Hotline 10001 No printer is installed or a default printer has not Install a printer and or select it as the default printer been set up
270. n keyboard is displayed 2 Repeat the password entry in the Confirm Password input field 3 Close the dialog with NOTICE Your password must not contain blank spaces or special characters Result You cannot open the Control Panel or Windows CE taskbar without entering a password NOTICE If the password is no longer available you cannot make changes in the Control Panel or use the Windows CE taskbar unless you update the operating system All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 115 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Procedure deleting a password Result Proceed as follows 1 Delete the entries in the Password and Confirm password input fields 2 Close the dialog with Password protection for the Control Panel and Windows CE taskbar has been removed 6 2 2 13 Changing Printer Settings Printing on Network Printers Requirement 116 HMI devices with a PROFINET interface can also print on network printers Hardcopies and logs can be printed on network printers Individual new incoming or outgoing alarms cannot be printed AS The Printer Properties dialog has been opened with the Printer F icon Printer Properties Ok x Printer Language jEpson9 41 Por
271. n the In the following cases the transfer settings might have to be changed e With the first project transfer e f changes are made to the project but are only applied later NOTICE are required e Close the project e The project is started again Transfer settings Transfer mode using MPI PROFIBUS DP The bus parameters are read from the project currently loaded on the HMI device You can change the settings for MPI PROFIBUS DP transfer The following steps e Change the settings on the HMI device e Then return to Transfer mode The changed MP PROFIBUS DP settings will be overwritten in the following cases e A project is transferred and started If the HMI device is in Transfer mode while changes are made to the transfer settings the settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted Requirements You have opened the S7 Transfer Settings dialog with the S7 Transfer Settings ii icon S 7 Transfer Settings OK MPI S7 Ethernet O Properties i Network selection TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Button for opening the properties dialog 175 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Select a network If you have chosen S7 Ethernet continue as described under Changing the network co
272. n your plant documentation Other Operator Actions The configuration engineer can configure the following actions for operator controls outside the Trend display e Enlarge display of time intervals e Reduce display of time intervals e Scroll back by one display width e Scroll forward by one display width e Stop or resume trend recording Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 268 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 12 Project Security 8 2 12 1 Overview Overview The configuration engineer can protect the operation of a project by implementing a security system The security system of the HMI device is based on permissions user groups and users If operator control objects protected by a password are operated the HMI device requests the entry of a password A logon screen is displayed in which you enter your user name and password After logging in you can operate the operator control objects for which you have the necessary permissions The logon dialog can be set up by the configuration engineer via an individual operator control object In the same way the configuration engineer can set up an operator control object to log off After logging off objects assigned password protection can no longer be operated to do so log in again Further informat
273. nCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 2 Transfer Proceed as follows On the configuring PC select the Transfer settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Select devices for transfer dialog opens Select the HMI device in the left area of the dialog Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC Set the connection parameters Set the transfer parameters in the right area of the dialog Start transfer in WinCC flexible with Transfer The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device The HMI device shuts down the current project and automatically switches to Transfer mode The project is transferred to the HMI device If the connection is not available or is defective an error message is displayed on the configuring PC When the transfer is completed successfully the project can be found on the HMI device The transferred project is then started automatically Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 Result See also Configuring the data channel Page 172 Setting the Operating Mode Page 195 Data Transmission Options Page 197 Overview Page 198 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 201 Commissioning a project 7 2 Transfer 7 2 4 Testing a Project Introduction There are two options to test a project Test the
274. nd operable screen objects Infotext can provide information on the value to be entered in an IO field for example Enter temperature setpoint for Tank 1 Range 40 to 80 C Infotext for Input Objects 236 Touch the _ IP key on the screen keyboard This key is only enabled if infotext or the current screen has been configured for the input object Note Switching between displayed infotext If infotext has been configured for an IO field and a screen touching the infotext window toggles between the two TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A Infotext for the Current Screen Infotext can also be configured for screens The infotext for the current screen is called up or by the screen keyboard or by an operator control object assigned to this function Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic Closing the Infotext Close the infotext with X 8 1 4 Project security 8 1 4 1 Overview Overview The configuration engineer can protect the operation of a project by implementing a security system The security system of the HMI device is based on permissions user groups and users If operator control objects protected by a password are operated the HMI device requests the entry of a password A logon screen is displayed in which you enter you
275. nd the PC Set the connection parameters Select the OS Update tab In Image path select the HMI device image file img The HMI device image files are available under WinCC flexible Images in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD In the output area you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image file after it is opened Switch into Transfer mode on the HMI device If you have activated automatic transfer mode for the HMI device the device automatically switches to Transfer mode when an update is initiated Select Update OS n the PC to run the operating system update Follow the instructions in ProSave During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 215 Commissioning a project 7 5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4 7 5 5 Resetting to factory settings with WinCC flexible Requirements No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to this configuration PC over the standard Ethernet cable Have the MAC address of the Ethernet interface on your HMI device to hand The MAC address is displayed briefly w
276. nfiguration Page 181 2 Use the Properties button to open the MPI or PROFIBUS dialog Station Parameters el Panel is the only master on the bus Address Time out Network Parameters SS Transmission Rate 187 5 kbits s Eg Highest Station 126 sx Station Parameters Panel is the only master on the bus Address Time out Network Parameters Transmission Rate Profile The HMI device is the only master on the bus Bus address of the HMI device Time out Data transmission rate in total network Highest station address in the network Profile Button for displaying the bus parameters OROROROROR ORS 3 If there are several masters connected on the bus deactivate the Panel is the only master on the bus check box NOTICE The bus address in the Address text box must be unique throughout the MPI PROFIBUS DP network TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 176 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 4 Enter the bus address for the HMI device in the Address text box Select the transmission rate from the Transmission Rate selection list Enter the highest station address on the bus in the Highest Station Address or Highest Station text box 7 With PROFIBUS settings Select the required profile in the Profile selection lis
277. ng Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 197 Commissioning a project 7 2 Transfer Serial data transmission with the TP 177A You can use one of the following adapters for serial transmission between TP 177A and a configuration PC e RS 232 PPI cable MM Multimaster e USB PPI cable MM Multimaster as of manufacturer version 05 of the cable Serial data transmission with TP 177B and OP 177B Use a PC PPI cable order number 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 for serial transmission between TP 177B or OP 177B and aconfiguration PC Resetting to factory settings via USB with TP 177B 6 and OP 177B You can only use the USB PPI cable MM Multimaster adapter as of manufacturer version 05 if you have updated the operating system with reset to factory setting in stand alone mode via ProSave 7 2 Transfer 7 2 1 Overview Transfer During transfer the project is downloaded from the configuration computer to the HMI device The Transfer mode can be started manually or automatically on the HMI device Transferred data is written directly to the flash memory on the HMI device The transfer function uses a data channel you need to configure before you initiate any transfers TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 198 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 2 Transfer 7 2 2 Starting Manual Transfer Introduction Requirements Procedure Result See also You can manually s
278. ng strips of the OP 177B 78 14 5 2x 45 18 7 18 7 47 3 18 18 18 7 7 200 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operator Controls and Displays Procedure 5 4 Labeling function keys on the TP 177B 4 and OP 177B Note With TP 177B 4 the slots are located at the sides of the HMI device With OP 177B the slots for the labeling strips are located on the bottom of the HMI device Proceed as follows 1 6 Edit and then print the template You can also print out an empty template and later write on it by hand Spray the labeling strips with fixing spray The fixing spray ensures that the text is water resistant and does not smear and that the printer ink on the keyboard membrane does not run Cut out the labeling strip Ensure that the corners are cut according to the diagram shown above as this makes it easier to slide them into the slot Remove any existing labeling strips Note Wait for the printed labeling strips to dry before you insert them Slide the labeling strips into the slot O Labeling strips on the Labeling strips on the OP 177B TP 177B 4 Slide the labeling strips into the slot up to the stop The labeling strips will protrude approximately 3 cm out of the slot The template dimensions for the labeling strips are designed so that the labeling is correctly placed for the function
279. ngs Introduction In different countries for example the date time and decimal points are displayed differently You can adjust this display to meet the requirements of different regions The country specific settings apply to the current project If the project language is changed the country specific settings are also changed Requirements You have opened the Regional and Language Settings dialog with the Regional Settings icon Regional and Language Settings Ea OK xi Regional Settings Number Tim Many programs have different international settings Regional adjustments in date time 9 currency and numbers conventions for displaying and sorting data can be achieved in changing those international settings Region L a eel Region selection list Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Select the region from the selection list 2 Change to the Number Currency Time and Date tabs and set the selection lists to the desired settings 3 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The HMI device s regional settings have been changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 155 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 6 3 Backup registry information Registry information and temporary data You can install and uninstall your own programs on
280. nnot be read or written e the computer name is correct e the server is registered Note for advanced users Interpret the value from HRESULT 160013 The specified server was started as InProc server Configure the server as OutProc Server or Local Server This has not been released and may possibly lead to incorrect behavior because the server is running in the same process area as the WinCC flexible Runtime software 160014 Only one OPC server project can be started on a Do not start a second project with OPC server PC MP An alarm is output when an attempt is functionality on the computer made to start a second project The second project has no OPC server functionality and cannot be located as an OPC server by external sources 170000 S7 diagnostics events are not indicated because it is not possible to log in to the S7 diagnostics functions at this device The service is not supported TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 348 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 170001 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed Set the controller to online mode because communication with the controller is shut down 170002 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed because reading of the diagnostics buffer SSL was canceled with error 170003 An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized The system returns internal error 2
281. not successful In this case it is advisable to check any subsequent system alarms too 80006 Since logging is not possible this causes a In the case of databases check if the corresponding data permanent loss of the functionality source exists and start up the system again 80009 A copying action has been completed successfully TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 341 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 80010 Since the storage location was incorrectly entered Configure the storage location for the respective log in WinCC flexible this causes a permanent loss of again and restart the system when the full functionality the functionality is required 80012 Log entries are stored in a buffer If the values are Archive fewer values read to the buffer faster than they can be physically Or written using a hard disk for example Increase the logging cycle overloading may occur and recording is then stopped 80013 The overload status no longer applies Archiving resumes the recording of all values 80014 The same action was triggered twice in quick succession Since the process is already in operation the action is only carried out once 80015 This system alarm is used to report DOS or database errors to the user 80016 The logs are separated by the s
282. ns 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Optical Feedback from Operator Controls The type of optical feedback depends on the operator control object e Buttons The HMI outputs different views of the Touched and Untouched states provided the configuration engineer has configured a 3D effect Touched state Untouched state The configuration engineer defines the appearance of a selected field for example its line width and color for the focus e Invisible buttons The focus for invisible buttons is not identified after selection by default No optical operation feedback is provided in this case The configuration engineer may however configure invisible buttons so that their outline appears as lines when touched This outline remains visible until the you select another operator control object e 1 0 fields After you touch an I O field a screen keyboard appears as optical operation feedback TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 247 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 2 Operating keys on the TP 177B 4 and OP 177B Function keys with global function assignment A function key with global function assignment always triggers the same action on the HMI device or in the PLC regardless of the current screen An example of such an action is the a
283. ns 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 231 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A Procedure Numerical and hexadecimal values can be entered character by character via the buttons on the numerical screen keyboard Proceed as follows 1 Touch the required input field on the screen Result The numerical screen keyboard opens and the existing value is displayed in the screen keyboard Enter the value You can only operate the keys that are displayed in the 3D view The operation of the keys depends on the nature of the values that are entered You have the following options to enter a value The existing value is deleted when you enter the first character Completely reenter the value Use the e and keys to move the cursor within the current value You can now edit or add to the characters of the current value Use the PSP key to delete the character to the left of the cursor Change the sign of the value using the _ f ie Select the IP key to view the infotext of the IO field This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the IO field or for the screen which contains the IO field Use the KE key to confirm your entry or cancel it with E Either action closes the screen keyboard Note Numerical I O fields can be assigned limit values The entered values are only accepted if they lie within these limits Values outside of the configured limi
284. ns A button for example is an operator control object Plant General term referring to machines processing centers systems plants and processes which are operated and monitored on an HMI device Process visualization Visualization of processes from the areas of production logistics and services in text based and graphics format Configured plant screens allow operator intervention in active plant processes by means of the input and output data Project Result of a configuration using an engineering software The project normally contains several screens with embedded system specific objects basic settings and alarms The project file of a project configured in WinCC flexible is saved under the file name extension hmi You need to distinguish between the project on the configuration computer and that on an HMI device A project may be available in more languages on the configuration PC than can be managed on the HMI device The project on the configuration PC can also be set up for different HMI devices Only the project set up for a particular HMI device can be transferred to that HMI device Project file File which is generated based on a source file for a specific HMI device when the configuration is completed The project file is transferred to the corresponding HMI device and is used to operate and monitor plants Refer to Source file Recipe Combination of tags forming a fixed data structure The data structure conf
285. ns are available for the range of changes that can be made e The administrator or a user with user management permission can change the data for all users on the HMI device system in the user view User name Group assignment Password Logoff time e Users without user management permission can only change their own user data Password Logoff time if configured Note You can only change the logoff time and password for the Admin user You can only change the logoff time for the PLC_User This user entry is used for logging in via the PLC 274 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Procedure Changing User Data in the Simple User View This procedure describes changing user data by the administrator or a user with user management permission Proceed as follows 1 In the user view touch the user whose user data you want to change The following dialog appears xi User User 1 Password ooo OK Cancel 2 Change the desired user data Touch the corresponding input field The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed 3 Touch the OK button The following dialog appears E x Group Group 1 M Logoff time 5 cance 4 Change the desired user data Touch the corresponding input field The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed 5 Touch the
286. nsferring back license keys Page 225 Then restart the restore process Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation When the restore is successfully completed the data backed up on the configuring PC is now on the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 205 Commissioning a project 7 3 Backup and Restore 7 3 3 Backup and Restore using ProSave Requirement The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed The data channel is configured on the HMI device Procedure for backup Proceed as follows 1 2 3 From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC Select the HMI device type in the General tab Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC Set the connection parameters 4 Select the data to be backed up in the Backup tab 5 Select the folder and file name for the backup file Result We psb If you are working with the TP 177A with WinCC flexible 2008 or higher and backup recipes in CSV format then select a folder A CSV file is created for each recipe in this folder Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the HMI device automatically sets Transfer mode when a backup is initiated Start the backup operation in ProSave with Start Backup Follow the
287. ntents for visible signs of transport damage and for completeness NOTICE Damaged parts Do not install parts damaged during shipment In the case of damaged parts contact your Siemens representative The following is contained in the delivery e HMI device e Accessory kit The accessory kit contains the following 1 terminal block for the power supply Mounting clamps for mounting the HMI device Additional documents may be enclosed with the accessory kit Keep the supplied documentation in a safe place The documentation belongs to the HMI device and is required for subsequent commissioning 4 2 Mounting the HMI Device Requirement All packaging components and protective foils should be removed from the HMI device You need the mounting clamps from the accessories kit for the installation The mounting seal must be available on the HMI device If the mounting seal is damaged order a replacement seal The mounting seal is part of the associated service pack Note Plastic mounting clamps are enclosed in the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and the OP177B Metal mounting clamps are included with the TP 177B 4 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 47 Installation and connection 4 2 Mounting the HMI Device Mounting clamps on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6 Use a plastic mounting clamp on each side of the HMI device to secure it in the mounting cut out
288. ntially explosive atmospheres if an electric plug is disconnected from the HMI device while the system is in operation In potentially explosive atmospheres always turn off power to the HMI device before disconnecting any connectors TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 33 Safety Instructions and General Notes 2 3 Notes about Usage Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Zones 2 and 22 Approval 34 Potentially explosive atmospheres are classified by zones The zones are classified according to the probability of the presence of an explosive atmosphere Zone Explosion hazard Example 2 Explosive gas atmospheres occur Areas around flanged pipe joints with flat seldom and briefly gaskets in closed rooms 22 Explosive dust atmospheres occur seldom and briefly Safe zone No e Outside zone 2 e Outside zone 22 e Standard applications for distributed IO The following certifications apply to the HMI device in accordance with e EN 60079 0 2006 e EN 60079 15 2005 e EN 61241 1 2004 e IEC 61241 0 2004 Cor 2005 valid 3G Ex nA II Tx x 13D Ex tD A22 IP6X T xx C x Temperature values see EU design examination certificate ion are available on the Internet at he desian examina ertifica ttp support automation siemens com The table below describes the test numbers of the HMI device classes
289. ntrol Panel button in the Loader to open the HMI device Control Panel Control Panel oR g OP Password MPDP Settings z bat Transfer Screensaver OP Changing screen settings displaying information about HMI device calibrating the touch screen Password Setting password protection for the Control Panel MPI DP settings Changing MPI DP Settings Screen saver Configuring the screen saver Transfer Change transfer settings configure the data channel Procedure Proceed as follows to change settings in the Control Panel 1 You must exit the project before changing settings in the Control Panel Use the relevant operator control object provided in the project Open the Control Panel as described above Open the desired dialog by double clicking on the corresponding icon in the Control Panel To change settings touch the respective input field or check box and use the displayed screen keyboard if necessary Enter the required password if the Control Panel is protected against unauthorized access Change the HMI device settings in the dialog Press x or Ok to close the dialog Press x or ok to close the dialog Start the project using the Loader TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 83 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A 6 1 2 2 Changing Screen Settings Requirem
290. o Time format 1 Time zone Setting Time a reactions Touch screen Noe eel 143 150 TP ITA Resetting to factory settings TP 177B Clearance TP 177B 4 Interfaces TP 177B 4 Displaying information 379 Index Trademarks 6 Training Center Transfer Automatic Cancel 68 Manual 199 Transfer mode MPI PROFIBUS DP Unintentional 94 94 127 uE Via MPI 175 Via PROFIBUS DP ere Transfer settings 95 128 143 172 Channel Directories 16 168 169 a Project 1 iene License key 225 Recipe data record 307 314 Transferring back License key Transport damage 244 267 Trend view 244 Value table 245 Trends Limit violation 244 Trends 244 Trends 267 Type of fixation 42 U Unintentional transfer mode 94 h27 Updating About ProSave Operating system 64 208 using WinCC flexible 214 Updating the operating system UPS Si pa Sonina ad Status 191 Wiring diagram 58 UPS properties Configuration 190 USB Connection sequence USB connection sequence Safety instruction USB device Connecting Use Conditions 39 380 In industry 8 In residential areas In the potentially explosive atmosphere 33 With additional measures User Logoff User data ba 249 77 B76 Change password 242 Changing group assignments 242 Changing the logoff time 242 Changing the user name 242 Changing user data Creating 241 273 Deleting Logoff L
291. o convert an existing ProTool project including a change of the HMI device for example from OP3 to OP 73 or from OP7 to OP 77B Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project including a change from a graphics device to a Windows CE device e Communication Communication Part 1 describes the connection of the HMI device to SIMATIC PLCs Communication Part 2 describes the connection of the HMI device to third party controllers TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 4 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Preface Operating instructions e Operating instructions for SIMATIC HMI devices OP 73 OP 77A OP 77B TP 170micro TP 170A TP 170B OP 170B OP 73micro TP 177micro TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B TP 270 OP 270 MP 270B MP 277 MP 370 MP 377 e Operating instructions for mobile SIMATIC HMI devices Mobile Panel 170 Mobile Panel 177 Mobile Panel 277 e Operating Instructions Compact for SIMATIC HMI devices OP77B Mobile Panel 170 Mobile Panel 177 Getting Started e WinCC flexible for first time users Based on an example project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring screens alarms recipes and screen navigation e WinCC flexible for power users Based on an example project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring logs project reports scripts user management multilingual projects and integrat
292. o the HMI device 12 Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress Result A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 210 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 4 Updating operating systems on the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 7 4 4 Updating the operating system with ProSave Requirement e The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed e When updating the operating system without reset to factory setting Procedure The data channel is configured on the HMI device Proceed as follows 1 11 Result When updating the operating system with reset to factory setting Switch off power to the HMI device From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC Select the HMI device type in the General tab Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC then set the connection parameters Select the OS Update tab Select whether to update the operating system with without resetting to factory settings by setting the Reset to factory settings check box accordingly In Image path select the HMI device image file img The HMI device image files are available under WinCC flexible Images in the WinCC f
293. ocedure Proceed as follows 1 When updating the operating system with reset to factory setting only Switch off power to the HMI device 2 On the configuration PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The dialog Communication settings opens Select the type of HMI device Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration PC then set the connection parameters Close the dialog with OK In WinCC flexible select the command OS Update in the Project gt Transfer menu Select whether to update the operating system with without resetting to factory settings by setting the Reset to factory settings check box accordingly 8 In Image path select the HMI device image file img The HMI device image files are available under WinCC flexible Images in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD In the output area you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image file after it is opened 9 When updating without reset to factory setting only Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when an update is initiated 10 In WinCC flexible select Update OS on the configuration PC to run the operating system update 11 When updating with reset to factory setting only Switch on the power supply t
294. ogon PLC_User 274 276 V Value table 245 Values W WinCC flexible internet settings 136 E mail E Mail Windows CE taskbar 96 Password protection 97 139 Server WINS server Wiring diagram Connecting peripherals Connecting the equipotential bonding Connecting the PLC 58 Connecting the power supply 55 UPS Working on the control cabinet 29 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1
295. on Valid certifications The overview below provides information on available certifications The HMI device itself is certified as shown on the label on its rear panel CE Certification CE The automation system meets the general and safety related requirements of the following EC directives and conforms to the harmonized European standards EN for programmable logic controllers published in the official gazettes of the European Union e 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive e 94 9 EC Equipment and Protective Systems Intended for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Explosion Protection Directive EC Declaration of Conformity The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the relevant authorities at the following address Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Industry Sector IA AS RD ST PLC P O Box 1963 D 92209 Amberg TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 30 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Safety Instructions and General Notes 2 2 Standards and Approvals UL approval Ou Underwriters Laboratories Inc conforming to e UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment e CSA C22 2 No 142 Process Control Equipment or Ou HAZ LOC Underwriters Laboratories Inc conforming to e UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment e CSA C22 2 No 142 Process Control Equipment e UL 1604 Hazardous Location e CSA 213 Hazardous Location Approved for use in
296. on Test Coltages Insulation resistance is demonstrated in the type test with the following test voltages conforming to IEC 61131 2 Circuits with a nominal voltage of Ue to other circuits or ground lt 50V Test voltage 500 V DC Protection Class Protection Class conforming to IEC 60536 i e equipotential bonding conductor to profile rail required Protection from foreign objects and water Degree of protection conforming to Explanation IEC 60529 Front When mounted e IP65 e NEMA 4X NEMA 12 indoor use only Rear IP20 Protection against touch with standard test fingers There is no protection against ingress by water The degree of protection provided by the front side can only be guaranteed when the mounting seal lies completely against the mounting cut out 3 5 Nominal Voltages The following table details the allowed rated line voltages and associated tolerance ranges HMI device Rated voltage Tolerance range TP 177A TP 177B 6 OP 177B 24 VDC 20 4 to 28 8 V 15 20 TP 177B 4 24 VDC 19 2 to 28 8 V 20 20 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 45 Planning Use 3 5 Nominal Voltages 46 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Installation and connection 4 4 1 Checking the package contents Check the package co
297. on PC Connection configurator 6 Connecting peripherals Wiring diagram Connecting the PLC Wiring diagram 58 Connecting the terminal block Connection configurator Configuration PC 61 Connection sequence 5 Connections Number 26 27 Contrast Changing 84 Control oro baht MPI MPI DP settings 91 Open Opening 82 98 Operating Password protection 82 97 PROFIBUS Screen keyboard Controller Configuring the interface 60 Controllers Number 26 Creating 372 Recipe data record 302 Currency D Data channel Authorizations Backing up Configuring Enabling Locking Parameter assignment 143 Restoring Transferring Updating the operating system 197 Data flow Date Setting Entering 236 Synchron izing Date format Date time properties Decimal Decimal places 231 Default gateway 134 181 Degree of protection 43 Delay time Changing 84 Setting 143 Delete Certificate Recipe Em 304 Deleting Certificate Device name For network operation 134 Setting DHCP 134 DIP switch Setting Direct connection 132 Direct key 249 disabling SecureMode disabling Password protection 153 183 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Index Display format Displaying Certificate HMI device information Information on the n fea 177B 4 164 Memory information 166 Sfr informat
298. on is no longer required 6 1 2 6 Changing the Password Settings Requirement ia aN ae ty The Password Properties dialog has been opened with the Password A icon vord Properties Password Settings Password e Password O Confirm passwora Hl o Input field for the password Input field for repeating the password TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 89 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A Procedure entering a password Result Proceed as follows 1 Enter a password in the Password input field Touch the input field The albhanumerical screen keyboard is displayed 2 Repeat the password entry in the Confirm Password input field 3 Close the dialog with OK NOTICE Your password must not contain blank spaces or special characters The Control Panel is now protected against unauthorized access Without entering a password you can read some settings but you cannot change them NOTICE If the password is no longer available you cannot change settings in the Control Panel and taskbar unless you update the operating system All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system Procedure deleting a password Result 90 Proceed as follows 1 Delete the entries in the Password and Confirm passwor
299. on keys on the TP 177B 4 and OP 177B ceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeetaeeeenneeeees Configuring the Operating System cecseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eaeee ee saeeeeeaseeseeesaeeeeeesaeeeesesaeeeseaeseseeeeeeeeeees 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeteaeeeeeenaees 8 6 1 1 OVENIO W cansi o a edie ee eed ee ete ee 8 6 1 2 Control Panolan Aen hel al nt tht 8 6 121 OVEIVIQW renren E ayevesesdavstecetiyviteeai elem da ota da veares diay eee tga eedaedeviaedavces 8 6 1 22 CHANGING Screen SONOS vu cia ees pssst ehiee cet exssetwen eeeceeeteestenh EE 6 1 2 3 Displaying Information about the HMI DeVICC ee eecceeeeteeeceenneeeeeteeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaaes 6 1 24 Calibrating the Touch SCHEGM assesi rannan saaveus a S Aa AARE RAA R 3 6 1 2 5 Display License Information isei seinninn ninnaa aaie raa iia kai 89 6 1 2 6 Changing the Password Settings eesseeseeeeeeeeeseeirreeerrstirttsttrnnsttnasttnnnsttnnatennnsttnnnaennnstnnnten nnt 89 612r Changing MPI DP Sets secnrenicaiiee aetccaensttuges eaayeee padeved aad cee ae devtea eetaateet tee 91 6 1 2 6 Setting the Screen SaVGhs i5 sesccedeeeeueee le ecteieed Wetted degli fenbsk hoot lve din i aecdh cdeeadedowet eeedeees 92 6 1 2 9 Configuring the Data Channelen naaa ANA AEA RA A 9 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B ccceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeneeeeeeeees
300. ons 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 1 Overview 7 1 1 Setting the Operating Mode Operating Modes Operating modes of the HMI device e Offline e Online e Transfer Offline mode and Online mode can be set on the configuration computer and on the HMI device To set these modes on the HMI device use a corresponding operator control object of the project Switching the Operating Mode The configuration engineer must have configured an appropriate operator control object to allow a change of the operating mode on the HMI device during ongoing operation Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic Offline Operating Mode In this mode there is no communication between the HMI device and PLC Although the HMI device can be operated it cannot exchange data with the PLC Online Operating Mode In this mode the HMI device and PLC communicate You can operate the plant on the HMI device according to your system configuration Transfer Operating Mode In this mode you can transfer a project from the configuration computer to the HMI device or backup and restore HMI device data for example The following options are available for setting Transfer mode on the HMI device e When the HMI device starts up Start Transfer mode manually in the HMI device Loader e During ongoing operation Start the Transfer mode manually within the project using an operator
301. ontrol object e 1 O fields After you touch an IO field a screen keyboard appears as optical operation feedback TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 228 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A 8 1 2 Setting the Project Language Introduction The HMI device supports multilingual projects You need to configure a corresponding operator control object which lets you change the language setting on the HMI device during runtime The project always starts with the language set in the previous session Requirements e The relevant project language must be available on the HMI device e The language switching function must be logically linked to a configured operator control object such as a button Selecting a Language You can change project languages at any time Language specific objects are immediately output to the screen in the relevant language when you switch languages The following options are available for switching the language 1 A configured operator control object switches from one project language to the next in a list 2 A configured operator control directly sets the desired project language Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 229 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177
302. opened with the S7 Transfer aii icon S7 Transfer Settings ok x i 1 Properties 1 0 Network selection Button for opening the properties dialog TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 119 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Select a network and then touch the Properties button One of the two following dialogs is displayed Station Parameters a M Panel is the only master on the bus C Address i nC Time out is 3 Network Parameters al 187 5 kbits s Sy Transmission Rate PROFIBUS Station Parameters al V Panel is the only master on the bus Address 45 Time out Highest Station Address 126 DP Profile The HMI device is the only master on the bus Bus address of the HMI device Time out Data transmission rate in total network Highest station address in the network Profile PG QOLOOHO Button for displaying the bus parameters 2 If more masters are connected to the bus deactivate the check box Panel is the only master on the bus 3 Enter the bus address for the HMI device in the Address input field Touch the input field A selection list is displayed 4 Select the highest transmission rate from the Transmission rate input field Touch the input field
303. or the controller and correct them as necessary 340 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 70032 The object configured with this number in the tab Check the number of the tab order and correct it if order is not available in the selected screen necessary The screen changes but the focus is set to the first object 70033 An e mail cannot be sent because a TCP IP Check the network connection to the SMTP server and connection to the SMTP server no longer exists re establish it if necessary This system alarm is generated only at the first attempt All subsequent unsuccessful attempts to send an e mail will no longer generate a system alarm The event is regenerated when an e mail has been successfully sent in the meantime The central e mail component in WinCC flexible Runtime attempts in regular intervals 1 minute to establish the connection to the SMTP server and to send the remaining e mails 70034 Following a disruption the TCP IP connection to the SMTP server could be re established The queued e mails are then sent 70036 No SMTP server for sending e mails is configured Configure an SMTP server An attempt to connect to an SMTP server has failed In WinCC flexible Engineering System and it is not possible to send e mails using Device se
304. or the transfer e Press the Start button to open the project stored on the HMI device e Press Control Panel to open the HMI device Control Panel The Control Panel is used to configure various settings such as the transfer settings e Press the Taskbar button to activate the taskbar containing the open Windows CE Start menu A Communication gt Favorites gt E Command Prompt gt 4 Softkeyboard Windows Explorer r EI 14 00 A TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 96 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Password protection You can protect the Control Panel and taskbar from unauthorized access When password protection is enabled the message password protect is displayed in the Loader If the password is not entered only the Transfer and Start buttons are operable This prevents inadvertent operations and increases security for the plant or machine because the settings cannot be changed when a project is not open NOTICE If the password is no longer available you cannot change settings in the Control Panel and taskbar unless you update the operating system All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system See also Changing the Password Settings Page 115 Switching on and Testing the HMI
305. ords from the PLC and to the PLC TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View Operator Controls of the Recipe View The table below shows the operator controls of the recipe view Buttons Function Creates a new recipe data record If a start value is configured it is shown in the input field Saves the displayed values of the recipe data record The storage location is predefined by the project The recipe data record is saved under a different name irrespective of the recipe view A dialog box opens in which the name is entered The displayed recipe data record is deleted ECC TP 177B and OP 177B The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the associated recipe tags The values changed during editing are written to the associated recipe tags Subsequently all the values of the tags are read out and updated in the table The recipe values from the PLC are displayed in the recipe view Le The values of the set recipe data record displayed in the recipe view are transferred to the PLC Operating the Recipe Screen You operate the recipes in a recipe screen with the operator controls provided by the configuration engineer Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Entering the value If you want to change the value of a tag
306. perating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 7 Transfering License Keys and Transfering Them Back 7 7 2 Transferring and transferring back license keys Requirements When transferring or transferring back using WinCC flexible No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC The data channel is configured on the HMI device The storage location and the license key awaiting transfer are ready Procedure for transferring a license key Proceed as follows 1 2 N OO on Ff Result Switch to Transfer mode on the HMI device When transferring using WinCC flexible Select the License Keys command in the menu Project gt Transfer The Automation License Manager opens When transferring using the Automation License Manager Start the Automation License Manager via the Windows Start menu Inthe Automation License Manager select the command Connect HMI device in the menu Edit gt Connect target system The Connect Target System dialog opens Under Device Type select the appropriate HMI device type Select the type of connection from the Connection box Set the connection parameters Select OK The connection to the HMI device is established The connected HMI device is displayed in the left window of the Automation License Manager Inthe left window select the source drive The ri
307. playing memory distribution 0 0 eee eee ee enee ee eeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeesesaeeeseeaeeesenaeeeaeeesenaaes 166 6 3 6 11 Activate memory MaNaGeMeNt cece eeeeee ee cette eect a E 6 3 7 Setting Storage lOCATION c c2sievesseccescceecsaecececctnaedeetcndecetenaceedtcnneedtcnseeeetcaaedthcsaeedencaaesencaehcaaeseeneay 168 6 3 8 Setting the delay UMG sasini a A cee viace en nerve era ented de andere 169 6 3 9 Enabling PROFINET lO iaiccstiteeessteered inane aaa baits Eaa a duane 6 3 10 Changing transfer settings cc eee eenee ene eeeeenneeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeneeaaeeeeseaaes 6 3 10 1 Configuring the data channel sessao EA 6 3 10 2 Changing MPI PROFIBUS DP settings 0 eee cee cee eene cece enter ee eaeeeeeeaeeesesaaeeeseeaeeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeees 6 23 11 NEtWOFK operations issii a a a a aa a a a 6 3 11 1 OVerviEW sn oa vets tes ce gonn nan anaa eaaa a RE EEEN AEEA tut danetetevacdadeesnetentaetiterteetsenaty 178 6 3 11 2 Setting the device name of the HMI device s nssnsnssssrssnrnrtntntnsnsintntntnntnnnnnnnnnnt nn nnnnn anne na 180 6 3 11 3 Changing the network configuration 0 eee ce eee cent cece aanne RAAE 8 6 3 11 4 Changing the logon Gata sa saciec scheceteceteatcesadeteey rintin e r irain ENE bedi EE EEEE EEEE 3 6 3 11 5 Changing e Mail Slinge ses isecicetadidertatiesdis oe reneveuseaeveitoben dinates AENA SKA ime A eee 6 3 11 6 Importing and deleting Certificates 2 2
308. ply UPS TP 177B 4 Note Observe all the notes relating to connecting a power supply See also Interfaces on the TP 177B 4 Page 51 4 3 8 Connecting the Controller Wiring diagram The figure below illustrates the connection between the HMI device and controller TP 177A Dg 8 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 58 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Installation and connection Third party controllers SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC 500 505 Third party controllers Third party controllers PROFINET RS 422 RS 485 pea OP 177B TP 177B 6 TP 177B 4 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device NOTICE Cables Always use the approved cables to connect a SIMATIC S7 PLC Standard cables are availabl on the Internet at TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 e for the connection Y automation siemens com can find more information about this O http mall 59 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device Connecting PROFINET NOTICE Use a cross cable for the PROFINET connection of the TP 177B 6 and the OP 177B when using a point to point connection NOTICE PROFINET IO is not capable of function If you connec
309. project 7 5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Result A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device The factory settings are reset Note If you can no longer call the Control Panel on the HMI device as the operating system is missing switch off the HMI device Then reset to factory settings and restart the HMI device If the HMI device doesn t start up switch it off and then on again Note Calibrating the touch screen After the reset you may have to recalibrate the touch screen 7 5 6 Resetting to factory settings with ProSave Requirement e The HMI device is connected over the Ethernet to a PC on which ProSave is installed e Have the MAC address of the Ethernet interface on your HMI device to hand The MAC address is displayed briefly when the HMI device is turned on The MAC address is displayed in the PROFINET dialog in the Control Panel Procedure Setting the PC interface 1 Select Start gt Control Panel gt Set PG PC interface on the configuration PC 2 Select S7ONLINE STEP7 gt TCP IP from the Application access point area 3 Select the interface which is connected to the HMI device from the Interface parameterization used area 4 Confirm your entries TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 218 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1
310. project on the configuring PC You can test a project at a configuring PC using a simulator For detailed information refer to the WinCC flexible user manual and to the WinCC flexible Online Help Offline testing of the project on the HMI device Offline testing means that communication between the HMI device and PLC is down while the test is being carried out Online testing of the project on the HMI device Online testing means that the HMI device and PLC communicate with each other during testing Perform the tests starting with the Offline test followed by the Online test Note You should always test the project on the HMI device on which the project will be used Check the following 1 2 3 4 Check the correct layout of the screens Check the screen navigation Check the input objects Enter the tag values The test increases the certainty that the project will run error free on the HMI device Requirements for offline testing Procedure The project has been transferred to the HMI device The HMI device is in Offline mode In Offline mode you can test individual project functions on the HMI device without them being affected by the PLC PLC tags therefore are not updated Test the operating elements and visualization of the project as far as possible without connecting to the PLC Requirements for online testing 202 The project has been transferred to the HMI device The HM
311. protocols or profiles that can be used Controller Protocol Profile TP 177B 4 TP 177B 6 TP 177B 6 OP 177B OP 177B PN DP DP PN DP DP PN DP SIMATIC MPI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 7 300 400 PROFIBUS DP up to Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 12 Mbps Yes No Yes No Yes PROFINET SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP up to Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 12 Mbps SIMATIC S7 200 PPI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes MPI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PROFIBUS DP CPU 215 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PROFIBUS DP standard Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes SIMATIC 500 505 NITP Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes Yes PROFIBUS DP up to Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 12 Mbps 1 PROFINET IO must be locked TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 27 Overview 1 11 Communication Using the TP 177B and OP 177B Third party controllers The following table shows controllers of other manufacturers and protocols or profiles that 28 can be used Controller Protocol Allen Bradley e DF1 1 3 4 6 PLC series SLC500 SLC501 SLC502 SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 MicroLogix e DH via DF1 gateway KF2 module 2 3 4 6 e DH485 via DF1 gateway via KF3 module 4 6 e DH485 Allen Bradley PLC series PLC 5 11 PLC5 20 PLC 5 30 PLC 5 40 PLC 5 40L PLC 5 60 PLC 5 60L PLC 5 80 e DF1 4 e DH via DF1 gateway KF2 module 4 6 Allen Bradley PLC series ControlLogix 5500 with 1756 ENBT and CompactLogix 5300 1769 L32E and 1769 L35E e
312. ption HMI Device 2 Device name of the HMI device Description for the HMI device optional Note To activate the network functions enter a unique computer name in the Device name input field Proceed as follows 1 Enter the device name for the HMI device in the Device name text box 2 If necessary enter a description for the HMI device in the Device description text box 3 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The device name for the HMI device is now set TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 11 3 Changing the network configuration Introduction You can change the network settings for the LAN connection under Network amp Dial Up Connections Requirements You have opened the following display by touching the Network amp Dial Up Connections e icon File Edit View Advanced e eE elix a Loh LANS115 Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Open the LAN9115 entry The LAN9115 Settings dialog opens LAN9115 Settings OK E IP Address Ethernet Parameters An IP address can be Obtain an IP address via DHCP automatically assigned to this shen a ces eee computer If your network Specify an IP address does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network IP Address 192 168 56 198 administrator for an
313. r e Does the network use DHCP for dynamic assignment of network addresses If not get a new TCP IP network address for the HMI device e What is the TCP IP address of the default gateway e Ifa DNS network is used what is the address of the name server e lf a WINS network is used what is the address of the name server TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 130 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 21 Setting the Device Name of the HMI Device Requirement The Communications Properties dialog has been opened with the E 4 G ey Communications icon Communications Properties Device Name Pc Connection Your device uses this information to 1 identify itself to other computers G m Device name without spaces mm i Device description fre 177B Device _ 3 The HMI device uses this information to identify itself to other PCs Device name of the HMI device Description for the HMI device optional Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Enter the device name for the HMI device in the Device name input field Touch the input field The screen keyboard is displayed 2 Enter a description for the HMI device in the Device description input field Touch the input field The screen keyboard is displayed 3 Close the dialog and save your entries
314. r HMI device in the Control Panel To change settings touch the respective input field or check box and use the displayed screen keyboard if necessary TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 5 Press OK or use the button to close the dialog 6 Press the button or Kj to close the Control Panel 7 Start the project in the loader 99 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 2 Input Using the Screen Keyboard Introduction A variety of screen keyboards are available to input information outside an open project for example in the Control Panel A screen keyboard appears as soon as you touch an input field You can switch the screen keyboard and change its position on screen Confirm your entries with or discard your entries with E Either action closes the screen keyboard Screen Keyboard Outside an Open Project e Numerical screen keyboard kelelele ef defxfe vfotn tm tel The alphanumerical keyboard has multiple levels 1 Normal level 2 Shift level 3 Level on which the control keys are activated The figure shows the normal level of the alphanumeric screen keyboard You can also reduce both screen keyboards TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 100 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP
315. r automatically restoring the file system on the memory card when the HMI device starts up and when a memory card is inserted Proceed as follows 1 Touch the Save Registry button to save the current registry settings 2 Touch the Save Files button to save temporary files 3 Specify whether or not the file system on the memory card should be restored when the HMI device starts up or when a memory card is inserted Activate the check box Automatically Repair if you wish to have the files system restored automatically Deactivate the check box Automatically Repair if you wish to have the files system restored only upon prompting 4 Close the dialog and save your entries with OK Touch X to discard the entries The HMI device uses the saved registry information the next time it starts The temporary files are copied back TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 9 Changing Screen Contrast Requirement The OP Properties dialog has been opened with the OP ip icon Procedure Proceed as follows 1 From the OP Properties dialog select the Display tab OP Properties Persistent Storage Display Device Touch Contrast __ uP DOWN 2 Button for increasing the contrast
316. r supply Perform a power up test to ensure the power supply is connected with the correct polarity PLC configuring PC if needed NOTICE Connection sequence Always follow the correct sequence for connecting the HMI device Failure to do so may result in damage to the HMI device Connecting the cables See also 50 When connecting the cables ensure that the contact pins are not bent Secure the connectors with screws The pin assignment of the ports is described in the technical specifications Safety Information Page 29 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device 4 3 1 Interfaces on the TP 177A The figure below shows the interfaces of the TP 177A HMI device Chassis terminal for equipotential bonding Power supply connector RS 422 485 interface IF 1B eo See also Power Supply Page 332 X10 IF 1B RS 422 RS 485 Page 332 4 3 2 Interfaces on the TP 177B 4 The figure below shows the interfaces of the TP 177B 4 HMI device RS 422 RS 485 port X10 IF 1B Chassis terminal for equipotential bonding PROFINET interface X1 P1 USB port X20 Power supply connector You connect the PROFIBUS DP or MPI to the X10 IF 1B port 0000o See also Connecting the Power Supply Page 55 Connecting the Controller Page 58 X20 USB Page 333 X1 PROFINET Pag
317. r user name and password After logging in you can operate the operator control objects for which you have the necessary permissions The logon dialog can be set up by the configuration engineer via an individual operator control object In the same way the configuration engineer can set up an operator control object to log off After logging off objects assigned password protection can no longer be operated to do so log in again Additional information on this may be available in your plant documentation User groups and permissions Project specific user groups are created by the configuration engineer The Administrators group is included in all projects by default User groups are assigned permissions The permission required for an operation is specifically defined for each individual object and function in the project The operating permissions can be saved with the Backup function Users Each user is assigned to exactly one user group Users can be created as follows e By the configuration engineer during configuration e By the administrator on the HMI device e By auser with user management permission on the HMI device TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 237 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A Logoff times A logoff time is configured in the system for each user If the time between any two user actions e g entering a valu
318. ral Notes 2 1 Safety Information Safety Instructions and General Notes 2 2 1 Safety Information Working on the cabinet Hazardous areas A wWaRNiNG Open equipment The HMI device is an open equipment This means that the HMI device may only be installed in cubicles or cabinets whereby the device can be operated from the front panel Access to the cubicle or cabinet in which the HMI device is installed should only be possible by means of a key or tool and for personnel who have received instruction or are authorized Danger high voltage Opening the cabinet will expose high voltage parts Contact with these parts could be fatal Switch off the power supply to the cabinet before opening it When operating the HMI device in hazardous areas the following warning applies A WARNING Explosion Hazard Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non hazardous Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class Division 2 or Zone 2 High frequency radiation TP 177A TP 177B OP NOTICE Unintentional operating situations High frequency radiation from mobile phones for example can cause unintentional operating situations 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 29 Safety Instructions and General Notes 2 2 Standards and Approvals 2 2 Standards and Approvals Valid certifications cauti
319. rate the touch screen 6 3 13 Setting the uninterruptible power supply Introduction Requirements 190 UPS monitoring is an option you load as an add on with ProSave A UPS ensures that the HMI device is shut down in a controlled manner after a buffer time in the event of a power failure This avoids the loss of data The following uninterruptible power supplies are supported e SITOP DC UPS modules as of a rated power value of 6 A e g 6 P1931 2DC42 Connect the UPS to the 24 V input and a USB port Configure the USB port for UPS monitoring p You have opened the UPS Properties dialog Configuration tab with the UPS EA icon UPS Properties Configuration Interface USB Battery _ Port tide aee 2 Text box for the time after which the Battery mode activated message is displayed Check box for enabling battery mode Text box for the time after which the Faulty port message is displayed Check box for the Faulty port message 0O00 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Procedure for setting the UPS Proceed as follows 1 2 Result Activate the Battery mode check box to enable battery mode Delete the entries in the min and s input fields You will receive a message when UPS takes effect
320. re displayed in the Trend view A Trend view can display several trends simultaneously 100 100 0 Ruler Trend value in the value table The appearance axes value range and labels of the Trend view can be set by the configuration engineer The configuration engineer can set limits for the trend values A color transition can be configured when the limits are exceeded Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic Value table The trend values can be read from the value table if this is configured Ruler The exact trend values can be read from the ruler if this is configured TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 267 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 11 2 Operating the Trend View Value Table The trend values are displayed in the value table When the ruler is displayed the trend values are shown at a position of the ruler When the ruler is hidden the latest trend values are displayed Ruler When configured a ruler is available to provide an exact reading of the individual values The position of the ruler can be changed by touching and dragging it on the touch screen The configuration engineer can configure the following actions for operator controls outside the Trend display e Display or hide ruler e Move ruler forward e Move ruler backward Further information on this may be available i
321. re indicated in the Alarm view or in the Alarm window on the HMI device The Alarm view can be implemented with the following components e Alarm numbers and alarm texts are displayed as single lines e As simple Alarm view e As advanced Alarm view In the simple or advanced Alarm views the configuration engineer specifies the alarm information to be displayed The layout and operation of the Alarm window correspond to that of the Alarm view The Alarm window is independent of the process screen Depending on the configuration the Alarm window appears automatically as soon as a new unacknowledged alarm has been received The Alarm window can be configured so that it only closes after all the alarms have been acknowledged Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 285 Operating Alarms 9 2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B Simple Alarm view 19 04 2005 11 41 37 156 Engine 23 too hot a dd b gt 2 ah The buttons have the following functions Button Function Displays infotext for an alarm Edit alarm Acknowledging an alarm Select the next or previous alarm in the list Scroll one page up or down gp EE Advanced Alarm view No Time Date status Text 156_ 12 04 5 J4 19 2005__ K Engine 23 too hot The buttons have the follo
322. rect trend 120002 The trend is not displayed because the tag Check if the data area for the tag exists in the controller assigned attempts to access an invalid controller the configured address is correct and the value range for address the tag is correct 130000 The action was not executed Close all other programs Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130001 The action was not executed Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130002 The action was not executed Close all other programs Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130003 No data medium found The operation is canceled Check for example if e the correct data medium is being accessed e the data medium is inserted 130004 The data medium is write protected The operation Check if access has been made to the correct data is canceled carrier Remove the write protection 130005 The file is read only The operation is canceled Check if access has been made to the correct file Edit the file attributes if necessary 130006 Access to file failed The operation is canceled Check for example if e the correct file is being accessed e the file exists e another action is preventing simultaneous access to the file 130007 The network connection is interrupted Check the network connection and eliminate the cause Data records cannot be saved or read over the of error network connection 130008 The storage card is not a
323. rent maximum e Power on current surge It e Approx 300 mA e Approx 500 mA e Approx 0 5 A2s Fuse internal Electronic 330 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Specitications 12 7 Specifications of the OP 177B 12 7 Specifications of the OP 177B HMI Device Weight without packing Approx 1000 g Display Type LCD STN Display area active 115 18 mm x 86 38 mm 5 7 Resolution Colors displayable 320 x 240 pixels 256 colors for OP 177B PN DP 4 colors blue mode for OP 177B DP Contrast control yes Back lighting CCFL Half Brightness Life typical 50 000 h Input unit Type Resistive analog touch screen Membrane keyboard Memory Program memory 2 MB Supply voltage Rated voltage 24 VDC Range permissible 20 4 V to 28 8 V 15 20 Transients maximum permissible 35 V 500 msec Time between two transients minimum 50s Current input e Typical e Constant current maximum e Power on current surge It e Approx 300 mA e Approx 500 mA e Approx 0 5 A2s Fuse internal Electronic TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 331 Specitications 12 8 Description of the Interfaces 12 8 Description of the Interfaces 12 8 1 Power Supply
324. rface parameters protocol settings PLC address Restart the system if the system alarm persists 220008 The communication driver cannot access or open Close all the applications which access this port and the specified port The port may be in use by restart the computer another application or the port used is not available Use another port of the system on the destination device There is no communication with the controller 230000 The value entered could not be accepted Enter a practical value or delete any unneeded users The system discards the entry and restores the previous value Either e the value range has been exceeded e illegal characters have been entered e the maximum permitted number of users has been exceeded 230002 The currently logged in user is not granted write Log on as a user with appropriate rights access rights The system therefore discards the input and restored the previous value 230003 Changeover to the specified screen failed because Configure the screen and check the screen selection the screen is not available configured The current function screen remains selected 230005 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in Observe the range of values for the tag when entering the IO field a value The original value of the tag is retained 230100 During navigation in the web browser the system Navigate to another page returned a message which may be of interest to the user The web browser
325. rformed Check the desired calculation and correct it if necessary 70025 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the system function The calculation of the system function is not performed Check the desired calculation and correct it if necessary 70026 No other screens are stored in the internal screen memory No other screens can be selected 70027 The backup of the RAM file system has been started 70028 The files from the RAM have been copied in the Flash memory The files from the RAM have been copied in the Flash memory Following a restart these saved files are copied back to the RAM file system 70029 Backup of the RAM file system has failed No backup copy of the RAM file system has been made Check the settings in the Control Panel gt OP dialog and save the RAM file system using the Save Files button in the Persistent Storage tab 70030 The parameters configured for the system function are faulty The connection to the new controller was not established Compare the parameters configured for the system function with the parameters configured for the controllers and correct them as necessary 70031 The controller configured in the system function is not an S7 controller The connection to the new controller was not established Compare the S7 controller name parameter configured for the system function with the parameters configured f
326. rical Values Variables can be assigned limit values The current limit values are indicated in the numerical screen keyboard If an Alarm window has been configured a system message is automatically output to indicate any violation of the configured input value limits For example 80 exceeds the configured limit value of 78 The entered value entered is rejected The original value is displayed again Decimal places for numerical values If a numerical input field is configured for a specific number of decimal points decimal places in excess of the limit are ignored Empty decimal places are filled with 0 after the number is confirmed Alphanumerical values Alphanumerical values numbers and letters can be entered character by character using the alphanumerical screen keyboard Symbolic values Symbolic values are entered from a list of predefined entries using the symbolic screen keyboard Date and time You can enter date time values character by character using the alphanumerical screen keyboard 8 1 3 2 Entering and Editing Numerical Values Numerical screen keyboard When you touch an IO field on the HMI touch screen the numerical screen keyboard appears The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete The display of the screen keyboard with a vertical mounting of the HMI device slightly differentiates from the figure above TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructio
327. riciieeriiirnr sarne n nein EEEL EEEE EE 2 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B sessiirrireniieeriiuiinrersnrrrnrserririrenredisanini ceninin 246 OVEIVIOW ccccciscsdedeiiasectiianceeessdacectid AEE AEAEE 00 CO NNN wha Operating keys on the TP 177B 4 and OP 177B Direct KE yS oaaae tet can ecb ce tale suet E sa scee EEES E AEE AA tel dade 249 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Table of contents 8 2 4 Setting the project language 2 veierse sies ia aaia EEE EAA AAEE K A 250 8 2 5 Entes and help within a project vx sssccacstaanaelieataswedssdanscenveneeesvatetita eal vexyadansadadananenuanaciseieuepiceds end 250 B21 OVEPWIOW E deuce sane st nett cg didnt ond cnn okt Se laste thd sac dohsuge ndieacevssiucasesandate dopdusensedendeascciltedetcreatssane 250 8 2 5 2 Entering numerical values on the TP 177A TP 177B and OP 177B cecceceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeees 252 8 2 5 3 Entering alphanumerical values on the TP 177A TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 254 8 2 5 4 Entering alphanumerical values on the TP 177B 4 ooo cccceccccec eens cneecee cance cnaeceeeseeneetieeneens 256 8 2 5 5 Entering and editing Symbolic valles 0 0 0 eee ceeeee ee enneeeeetee eset eaeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeesaeeeseeaeeseenneeaaes 258 8 2 5 6 Entering the Date and Time 22 s cscccccesticsensanesteennateasienstaneeqetstesanestencestinenscesteenencodnenaneeteee 258 8 29 WIGWING WMO
328. ring values Value display with current value You can configure the appearance and the elements of the slider control The slider control can contain a label and a setting range for example The current value can be configured to appear below the area of the slider control Proceed as follows 1 Touch the slider 2 Move the slider to the required value If a value display has been configured you can check the exact value that has been set 3 Release the slider The set value is applied The assigned value has been changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 9 Using the Status Force Display Use Appearance You read or write access values of the connected controller directly in the status force view The status force view allows you to carry out operations such as monitoring or modifying the addresses of the controller program without the need of an online connection via PC or PG Note The status force view can only be used in combination with SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7 controllers The figure shows the general layout of the status force view A value can be monitored and controlled on every line The configuration engineer specifies which columns appear in the status force view The table shows the significance of the potential columns Column F
329. rtClient view 265 Mounting EMC compliant 36 HMI device Horizontal mounting Vertical Mounting clamp Mounting cut out Dimensions 4 Preparing 44 Mounting location Selecting Mounting position HMI device Mouse External Mouse wie 104 MPI Setting 143 MPI DP settings 91 Multi key operation Multimedia card MultiMedia card 76 N Name server 182 Name Server 134 Network Configure Logon data Set up 178 Setting Network amp dial up connections 143 Network ID Network operation Device name 180 Options Network settings Number format 143 Numerical TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Screen keyboard Numerical screen keyboard Numerical value Changing Decimal places 253 Display format 252 Entering Limit value test numerical values Changing 232 Entering 232 Numerical values Decimal places Entering 230 Formats 230 Limit value test O ome Offline Recipe tag Test 20 Online Recipe tag 3 Test OP 177 Clearance 44 OP proportion 6 87 92 112 113 124 Device 16 Memory monitoring Persistent storage 156 Touch 150 Open Control Panel 142 Loader AK Operate Recipe menu 310 Recipe screen 310 Operating Control Panel 144 Operating elements OP 177B TP 177A and TP 177B 6 TP 177B 4 Operating mode Offline 19 Overview 195 Switching 195 Tr
330. rver is needed for addressing via device name names when the HMI device is ina TCP IP or PROFINET network Appropriate servers are available in common TCP IP and PROFINET networks Consult your network administrator if you have questions in this regard Printing via a Network Printer The HMI device s operating system does not support the direct alarm logging via a network printer All other printer functions such as printing hardcopies or logs are possible via the network without restriction TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 129 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B General Procedure for Configuring the Network The HMI device must be appropriately configured before setting into network operation The configuration is basically divided into the following steps e Set device name of the HMI device e Configure the network address e Set the logon information e Save the settings e Switch off the HMI device once the network is configured If your network address is assigned automatically Before switching the HMI device on insert the network cable in the corresponding interface so that a unique IP address for the HMI device can be assigned during startup e Switch on the HMI device Preparation Before beginning the configuration request the following network parameters from your network administrato
331. s recipe data records in tabular form Depending on the configuration the recipe view is displayed as follows e As enhanced recipe view e As simple recipe view The configuration engineer also defines which operator controls are displayed in the recipe view Only the simple recipe view can be configured on the TP 177A Enhanced recipe view on the TP 177B and OP 177B The figure below shows an example of the enhanced recipe view Recipe Name No Orange Data Record Name No Nectar Ki 2 4 im iil Bi amx aaO Ready 7 Selection list for the recipe Selection list for the recipe data record Element name The element name designates a specific element in the recipe data record Display field This show the number of the selected recipe or the selected recipe data record Value of the element Buttons for editing a recipe data record Status bar for display of the status messages eee O0QO TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 296 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 10 4 Displaying a Recipe Simple recipe view The simple recipe view consists of three areas e Recipe list e Record list e Element list In the simple recipe view each area is shown separately on the HMI device Depending on the configuration the simple recipe view starts with the recipe list or data record list The figure below shows an example of the record list
332. s and tests TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Safety Instructions and General Notes 2 3 Notes about Usage 2 3 Notes about Usage Use in Industrial Environments The HMI device is designed for industrial use It conforms to the following standards e Requirements for unintentional emissions EN 61000 6 4 2007 e Requirements for interference immunity DIN EN 61000 6 2 2005 Use in Residential Areas Note The HMI device is not suitable for use in residential areas If you use the HMI device in residential areas the radio TV reception may be impeded If the HMI device is used in residential areas you must take measures to achieve limit class B conforming to EN 55011 for RF interference A suitable measure for achieving the required RF interference level for limit class B includes for example e Use of filters in electrical supply lines Individual acceptance is required Use in Potentially Explosive Atmosphere Zones 2 and 22 caution The following overview shows possible certifications The HMI device itself is certified as shown on the label on its rear panel Explosion hazard Operate the HMI device in a potentially explosive zone 2 atmosphere only if it has been approved and certified for such environments A WARNING Personal Injury and Property Damage Can Occur Personal injury and property damage can occur in pote
333. s query is displayed when license keys are available both on the HMI device and in the backup data If necessary cancel the restore process with the No button and first back up the HMI device s license keys For more information refer to the section Transferring and transferring back license keys Page 225 Then restart the restore process 3 Start to restore the data by selecting Yes A progress bar shows the status of the restoration of the Windows CE image 4 After successful restoration of the Windows CE image the following message is displayed Restore of CE Image is finished The device will be rebooted now Don t remove the storage card Acknowledge this message 5 The HMI device starts The operating system boots opening the Loader and Restore dialog in sequence 6 The restore process is resumed All data stored on the flash file system is restored Afterwards the following message is displayed Restore succesfully finished Press ok remove your storage card and reboot your device 7 Remove the external memory 8 Acknowledge this message The HMI device starts TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 189 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Result The data from the external memory is now on the HMI device Note Calibrating the touch screen After the reset you may have to recalib
334. se for example for a text box The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete Min 50 Max 78 3 A 2 ES 4 BS ul 7 BBE lta es al ES 3 G 9 0 B c 3P 5 8 F E E Help 1 t B c D E Note Opened screen keyboard When the screen keyboard is open PLC job 51 Select screen has no function Formats for numerical values You can enter values in numerical text boxes based on the following formats e Decimal e Hexadecimal e Binary Limit value test of numerical values Tags can be assigned limit values The current limit values are indicated in the numerical screen keyboard If you enter a value that lies outside of this limit it will not be accepted for example 80 with a limit value of 78 In this case the HMI device will deliver a system alarm if an alarm window is configured The original value is displayed again TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 252 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Decimal places for numerical values The configuration engineer can define the number of decimal places for a numerical text box The number of decimal places is checked when you enter a value in this type of I O field e Decimal places in excess of the limit are ignored e Empty decimal places are filled with 0 Procedure Numerical and hexadeci
335. select the Touch tab OP Properties Display Device Touch License If your device is not responding properly to your D taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start tap Recalibrate Recalibrate m e If the HMI device does not react precisely to a touch the touch screen may require calibration Button for calibrating the touch screen 2 Touch the Recalibrate button The following dialog appears Carefully press and briefly hold stylus on the center of the target Repeat as the target moves around the screen o Carefully press the center of the calibration crosshairs Repeat the process as long as the calibration crosshairs move on the touch screen Calibration crosshair TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 87 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A 3 Briefly touch the calibration crosshairs The calibration crosshairs then goes to four more positions Touch the center of the calibration crosshairs for each position If you do not touch the center of the calibration crosshair the procedure is repeated Once you have touched the calibration crosshairs for all positions the following dialog appears New calibration settings have been measured Tap the screen to register saved data Wait for 30 seconds to cancel saved data and keep the current
336. setting Time limit 30 see 9 The new calibration values are measured Touch the touch screen to save the calibration values If you do not touch the screen within 30 seconds the new calibration values will be discarded Time remaining until the calibration values are discarded 4 Touch the screen within 30 seconds The new calibration is saved If you wait longer than 30 seconds the new calibration is discarded and the original calibration remains in effect 5 Close the dialog with The Control Panel is displayed Result The HMI device touch screen is now recalibrated TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 88 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A 6 1 2 5 Display License Information Requirement The OP Properties dialog has been opened with the OP ip icon Procedure Proceed as follows 1 From the OP Properties dialog select the License tab OP Properties Display Device Touch License This device contains Software licensed under a Free Software Licence These embedded free software files are protected by copyright Please find the licensing information and source files of the open source software on the accompanying co The License tab displays the license information for the software of the HMI device 2 Use x or to close the dialog when the informati
337. sful A backup has been made of the tables of the corrupted log file and the cleared log was restarted No action is necessary However it is recommended to save the backup files or delete them in order to make the space available again 80035 An error has occurred in the initialization of the logs An attempt has been made to create backups of the tables and this has failed No logging or backup has been performed It is recommended to save the backups or to delete them in order to release memory 80044 The export of a log was interrupted because Runtime was closed or due to a power failure It was detected that the export needed to be resume when Runtime restarted The export resumes automatically TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 343 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 80045 The export of a log was interrupted due to an The export is repeated automatically Check error in the connection to the server or at the server itself e the connection to the server e if the server is running e if there is enough free space on the server 80046 The destination file could not be written while Check if there is enough space on the server and it you exporting the log have permission to create the log file 80047 The log could not be read while
338. sible to use the maximum values for all objects because the available memory of the HMI device is limited For additional information on calculation of the system limits see the WinCC flexible online help TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 23 Overview 7 8 Functional scope with WinCC flexible Alarms Object Specification TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B Alarm Number of discrete alarms 1000 2000 Number of analog alarms 15 50 Length of the alarm text 80 characters Number of tags in an alarm Max 8 Display Alarm view Alarm window Acknowledge single error alarms Yes Acknowledge several error alarms Yes 16 acknowledgment groups simultaneously group acknowledgement Edit alarm Yes Alarm indicator Yes Alarm buffer Memory characteristics Volatile Non volatile Alarm buffer capacity 256 alarms Simultaneously queued alarm Max 64 events View alarm Yes Delete alarm buffer Yes Print alarm line by line No Yes Tags Values Lists and Calculation Functions Object Specification TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B Tag Number 500 1000 Limit monitoring Input Output Yes Linear scaling Input Output Yes Text List Number 300 Screens Object Specification TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B Screen Number 250 500 Fields per screen 30 50 Tags per screen 30 50 Complex objects per screen 5 e g b
339. sing widely available touch screens in addition to the membrane keyboard The function keys can be configured to system keys for specific screens The TP 177A TP 177B and OP 177B panels offer quick commissioning times large user memory and high performance and they are optimized for projects based on WinCC flexible TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 15 Overview 1 2 Design of the TP 177A HMI Device 1 2 Design of the TP 177A HMI Device Front view and side view S SIEMENS Opening caused by design not a slot for a memory card Display touch screen Mounting seal O00 Mounting clamp recess Bottom view TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 16 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Overview 7 3 Design of the TP 177B 6 HMI device Rear view Opening caused by design not a slot for a memory card Rating label DIP switch Interface name 0O00 1 3 Design of the TP 177B 6 HMI device Front view and side view SIEMENS ae _ Slot for a MultiMedia card Display touch screen Mounting seal Mounting clamp recess TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 17 Overview 1 3 Design of the TP 177B 6 HMI device Bottom view of a TP 177B 6 DP Bottom view of a TP 177B 6 PN DP Rear view Slotfor a MultiMedia car
340. ssible The data on the memory card is lost if you attempt to remove it while the HMI device is accessing its data Do not remove the memory card while data is being accessed Observe the corresponding alarms on the screen Proceed as follows 1 Unplug the memory card from the memory card slot 2 Store the memory card in a safe place TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 77 Operator Controls and Displays 5 4 Labeling function keys on the TP 177B 4 and OP 177B 5 4 Introduction Labeling function keys on the TP 177B 4 and OP 177B You can label the function keys as required for your project Use labeling strips to do so NOTICE Do not write on the keyboard to label the function keys Printing Labeling Strips WinCC flexible comes with a range of labeling strip templates You will find further information regarding the location of the templates in the WinCC flexible online help Any printable and writable foil can be used as labeling strips You can use transparency film the keyboard membrane of the HMI device is printed on the reverse side Use transparent foil so that the LEDs of the function keys can be seen The permitted thickness of the labeling strip is 0 15 mm Paper should not be used as labeling strips Dimensions for the labeling strips of the the TP 177B 4 14 2x 45 14 135 Dimensions for the labeli
341. structions examples and reference information in electronic form Basic Knowledge Requirements General knowledge of automation technology and process communication is needed to understand the operating instructions It is also assumed that those using the manual have experience in using personal computers and knowledge of Microsoft operating systems Range of Validity for the Operating Instructions These operating instructions apply to the HMI devices TP 177A TP 177B and OP 177B in combination with the WinCC flexible software package TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 3 Preface Position in the Information Scheme These operating instructions form part of the SIMATIC HMI documentation The following provides an overview of the information landscape for SIMATIC HMI User manuals e WinCC flexible Micro Describes the basics of configuration with the WinCC flexible Micro engineering system e WinCC flexible Compact Standard Advanced Describes basic principles of configuration using the WinCC flexible Compact WinCC flexible Standard WinCC flexible Advanced engineering systems e WinCC flexible Runtime Describes how to commission and operate your runtime project on a PC e WinCC flexible Migration Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project to WinCC flexible Describes how to convert an existing WinCC project to WinCC flexible Describes how t
342. t 8 With PROFIBUS settings If you want to view the profile data press the Busparameter button of the PROFIBUS dialog The profile data are displayed The Profile dialog is read only NOTICE The bus parameters must be the same for all stations in the MPI PROFIBUS DP network Profile Tslot 1000 Min Tsdr ala Max Tsdr 800 11 tBit 76 tBit 800 tBit Tset 16 Taqui 9 Gap factor 10 Retry limit 4 9 Close the Profile dialog 10 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The MPI PROFIBUS DP settings of the HMI device have been changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 177 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 11 6 3 11 1 Introduction Addressing 178 Network operation Overview You can connect the HMI device to a PROFINET network via the Ethernet port Note The HMI device can only be used in PROFINET networks If Sm rtService or Sm rtAccess are not used on the HMI device the following applies The HMI device only has client functionality in the PC network This means that users can access files of a node with TCP IP server functionality from the HMI device via the network However you cannot for example access data on the HMI device from a PC via the network The Sm rtService or Sm rtAccess options enable access to an HMI de
343. t Network Network server32 printerol 3 Paper Size a4 344 Orientation al Portrait Landscape Draft Mode color _ 6 Printer selection list Interface Network address of the printer applies to TP 177B 6 PN DP and OP 177B PN DP Paper size selection list Orientation setting 00000 Print quality setting TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Touch the Printer Language selection list and select a printer 2 Touch the Port selection list and set the port for the printer 3 Applies to TP 177B 6 PN DP and OP 177B PN DP with a Network interface Touch the Network selection field to enter the network address of the printer The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed 4 Touch the Paper Size selection field and select the format of the paper 5 Touch the desired check box in the Orientation field Portrait Landscape 6 Select the print quality Activate the check box Draft Mode if you wish to print a draft Deactivate the check box Draft Mode if you wish to print with higher quality 7 Set the color mode Activate the check box Color if you wish to print in color Deactivate it to print in monochrome 8 Close the dialog and sav
344. t interference intensity Electrostatic discharge Air discharge 8 kV 3 conforming to Contact discharge 6 kV IEC 61000 4 2 Burst pulses 2 KV power cable 3 high speed transient 2 KV signal cable gt 30 m interference 1 KV signal cable lt 30 m conforming to IEC 61000 4 4 High power surge pulses conforming to IEC 61000 4 5 external protective circuit required refer to the manual Programmable Controller S7 300 Installation chapter Lightning and Overvoltage Protection e Asymmetric coupling 2 kV power cable 3 DC voltage with protective elements 2 KV signal data cable gt 30 m with protective elements as required e Asymmetric coupling 1 kV power cable 3 DC voltage with protective elements 1 KV signal cable gt 30 m with protective elements as required Sinusoidal Interferences The table below shows the EMC properties of the modules as they relate to sinusoidal interference The HMI device must fulfill the specifications and directives relating to electrical installation as a basic prerequisite Sinusoidal interference Test values Corresponds to test intensity RF interference 3 electromagnetic fields e Conforming to 80 amplitude modulation at 1 kHz IEC 61000 4 3 with 10 V m in the range of 80 MHz to 1 GHz with 3 V m in the range 1 4 GHz to 2 GHz e Conforming to with 1 V m the range 2 GHz to 2 7 GHz IEC 61000 4 3 10 V m with 50 pulse modulation at 900 MH
345. t the HMI device directly to the controller it could cause PROFINET IO direct keys not to function properly Connect the switch with a PROFINET cable to the HMI device For detailed instructions regarding the installation of PROFINET networks please refer to the PROFINET system description manual Only connect the HMI device to public Ethernet networks using a switch or comparable device Configuring the RS 485 Interface 60 A DIP switch for the configuration of the RS 485 interface is located on the back side of the HMI device In the factory state the DIP switch is set for communication with the SIMATIC S7 controller Note Note the diagrams of the DIP switch settings on the back of the HMI device The following table shows the settings of the DIP switch The transmitting and receiving directions will be switched over internally with the RTS signal Communication Switch setting Meaning RS 485 4321 No RTS on plug for data transfer between PLC and mmm HMI device ON factory state 4321 RTS on pin 4 same as PLC for example for commissioning ON S 4321 RTS on pin 9 same as programming device for example for commissioning 3 ON RS 422 4321 RS 422 port is active ON TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Installation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device See also Interfaces on the TP 1
346. ta is overwritten The restored user data and passwords are valid immediately Limits for User Password and User View Number of characters Length of user name maximum 40 Length of password minimum 3 Length of password maximum 24 Entries in user view maximum 50 8 2 12 2 User Logon Requirements Use the logon dialog to log into the security system of the HMI device Enter user name and password in the logon dialog x User Password OK Cancel You have the following options for displaying the logon dialog e Touching an operating element with password protection e Touching an operating element that was configured for displaying the logon dialog e Double click the lt ENTER gt entry in the simple User view e Atthe beginning of the project the logon dialog will be automatically displayed in certain circumstances Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 271 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Enter the user name and password Touch the corresponding input field The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed 2 Touch the OK button Note The user name is not case sensitive The password is case sensitive Result After a successful logon to th
347. tag addresses are configured in the controller canceled due to an error e The recipe number exists e The data record number exist e The Overwrite function parameter is set 290026 An attempt has been made to read write a data Set the data record status to zero record although the data record is not free at present This error may occur in the case of recipes for which downloading with synchronization has been configured 290027 Unable to connect to the controller at present Check the connection to the PLC As a result the data record can neither be read nor written Possible causes No physical connection to the controller no cable plugged in cable is defect or the controller is switched off 290030 This alarm is output after you selected screen Reload the data record from the storage location or retain which contains a recipe view in which a data record the current values is already selected 290031 While saving it was detected that a data record Overwrite the data record or cancel the action with the specified number already exists 290032 While exporting data records it was detected that a Overwrite the file or cancel the process file with the specified name already exists 290033 Confirmation request before deleting data records TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 358 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number 290040 Effect cause A data recor
348. ted because the configured Check the configuration controller type does not exist for this tag 190006 The tag is not updated because it is not possible to Check the configuration map the controller type in the data type of the tag 190007 The tag value is not modified because the Set online mode or reconnect to the controller connection to the controller is interrupted or the tag is offline 190008 The threshold values configured for the tag have Observe the configured or current threshold values of been violated for example by the tag e a value entered e a system function e ascript TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 349 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause 190009 An attempt has been made to assign the tag a value which is outside the permitted range of values for this data type For example a value of 260 was entered for a byte tag or a value of 3 for an unsigned word tag Observe the range of values for the data type of the tags 190010 Too many values are written to the tag for example in a loop triggered by a script Values are lost because only up to 100 actions are saved to the buffer Increase the time interval between multiple write actions 190011 Possible cause 1 The value entered could not be written to the configured controller tag because the high or low limit was exceede
349. tes If required start the importing process with the Import button A dialog with source details will open 3 If required delete certificates with the Remove button Mark the desired certificate 4 If you want to list the properties of the certificate marked press the View button 5 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The certificates have been changed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 185 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 12 Backup and restore 6 3 12 1 Saving to external storage device backup Introduction A backup involves copying the operating system applications and data from the internal in flash memory of the HMI device to an external storage device Requirements e The HMI device features an external storage device with sufficient free space e You have opened the Backup Restore dialog with the Backup Restore Q icon Backup Restore All other application must be ended before starting lt BACKUP gt or lt RESTORE gt Backup to storage card BACKUP Restore from storage card RESTORE Procedure using a memory card for the first time NOTICE Loss of data possible The first time you use a memory card the HMI device will request that you format the card Save a backup copy of memory card data to a PC before formatting
350. the system time of the operating system TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 339 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 70015 The system time could not be read because Windows rejects the reading function 70016 An attempt was made to select a screen by means of a system function or job This is not possible because the screen number specified does not exist Or A screen could not be generated due to insufficient system memory Check the screen number in the function or job with the screen numbers configured Assign the number to a screen if necessary 70017 Date Time is not read from the area pointer because the address set in the controller is either not available or has not been set up Change the address or set up the address in the controller 70018 Acknowledgment that the password list has been successfully imported 70019 Acknowledgment that the password list has been successfully exported 70020 Acknowledgment for activation of alarm reporting 70021 Acknowledgment for deactivation of alarm reporting 70022 Acknowledgment to starting the Import Password List action 70023 Acknowledgment to starting the Export Password List action 70024 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the system function The calculation of the system function is not pe
351. tialized No values are logged until the alarm 80026 is output 80029 The number of logs specified in the alarm could not be initialized The logs are initialized The faulty log files are not available for logging jobs Evaluate the additional system alarms related to this alarm which is also generated Check the configuration the ODBC Open Database Connectivity and the specified drive 80030 The structure of the existing log file does not match the expected structure Logging is stopped for this log Delete the existing log data manually in advance 80031 The log in CSV format is corrupted The log cannot be used Delete the faulty file 80032 Logs can be assigned events These are triggered as soon as the log is full If WinCC flexible Runtime is started and the log is already full the event is not triggered The log specified no longer logs data because it is full Close WinCC flexible Runtime delete the log then restart WinCC flexible Runtime Or Configure a button which contains the same actions as the event and press it 80033 System Defined is set in the data log file as the data source name This causes an error No data is written to the database logs whereas the logging to the CSV logs works Install MSDE again 80034 An error has occurred in the initialization of the logs An attempt has been made to create the tables as a backup This action was succes
352. time limited emergency authorization 240003 Authorization failed Restart WinCC flexible Runtime or reinstall it Without authorization WinCC will run in demo mode 240004 Error while reading the emergency authorization Restart WinCC flexible Runtime install the authorization WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode or repair the authorization see Commissioning Instructions Software Protection 240005 The Automation License Manager has detected an Reboot the HMI device or PC If this does not solve the internal system fault problem remove the Automation License Manager and Possible causes install it again e A corrupt file e A defective installation e No free space for the Automation License Manager etc 250000 The tag in the specified line in Status force is not Check the set address and then verify that the address is updated because the address configured for this set up in the controller tag is not available 250001 The tag in the specified line in Status force is not Check the set address updated because the controller type configured for this tag does not exist 250002 The tag in the specified line in Status force is not Check the set address updated because it is not possible to map the controller type in the tag type 250003 An attempt to connect to the PLC failed The tags Check the connection to the PLC Check that the are not updated controller is switched on and is online TP 177A TP 177
353. ting Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Commissioning a project 7 3 Backup and Restore Procedure for restoring Proceed as follows 1 on Fw N 10 Result On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens Select the type of HMI device Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC Set the connection parameters Close the dialog with OK Select the Restore command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The SIMATIC ProSave Restore dialog opens Select the psb backup file to be restored from the Open field You can see the HMI device for which the backup file was created and the type of backup data the file contains Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when a restore operation is initiated Start the restore operation in WinCC flexible with Start Restore on the configuration PC If there are license keys both on the HMI device and in the backup a dialog box will appear Use this dialog to establish whether you want to overwrite the license keys or abort the restore process f necessary abort the backup and first back up the License Keys of the HMI device For more information refer to the section Transferring and tra
354. ting Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 If you want to switch from winter to summer time select the Daylight savings time currently in effect check box When you press the Apply button the time is brought forward by one hour 7 If you want to switch from summer to winter time deactivate the Daylight savings time currently in effect check box When you press the Apply button the time is moved backwards by one hour 8 Close the dialog and save your entries with OK Touch X to discard the entries NOTICE Reboot the HMI device if you have made changes to the time zone Result The settings for the date and time of day have now been changed Synchronizing the date and time with the PLC The date and time of the HMI device can be synchronized with the controller if this has been configured in the project and the controller program Additional information on this subject is available in the WinCC flexible system manual NOTICE Synchronize the date and time if time based reactions are to be triggered in the PLC 6 2 2 8 Saving Registry Information Introduction If you are running your own programs on the HMI device under MS Windows CE you should back up the registry information after installing the programs There are several ways to save files e Save the registry in
355. ting Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Glossary Transfer mode an operating mode of the HMI device in which an executable project is transferred from the configuration computer to an HMI device Acknowledge Acknowledging an alarm confirms that you have noted it AG Controller of the SIMATIC S5 series such as the AG S5 115U for example Alarm logging Output of user specific alarms to a printer in parallel to their output to the HMI device screen Alarm acknowledging Acknowledging an alarm confirms that you have noted it Alarm activated Moment at which an alarm is triggered by the controller or HMI device Alarm deactivated Moment at which the initiation of an alarm is reset by the controller Alarm user specific A user specific alarm can be assigned to one of the following alarm classes e Error e Operation e User specific alarm classes A user specific alarm designates a certain operating status of the plant connected to the HMI device via the controller TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 365 Glossary Array Area reserved in configured screens for the input and output of values AS Controller of the SIMATIC S7 series such as a SIMATIC S7 300 AS 511 Protocol of the programming device interface of a SIMATIC S5 controller Boot loader Used to start the operating system Automatically started when the HMI device is switched on A start s
356. tion if you contact A amp D Technical Support You have opened the OP Properties dialog Device tab with the OP ie icon The HMI device specific information is displayed in the Device tab The data displayed are device specific and may therefore deviate from that of your HMI device OP Properties Persistent Storage Display it Device TP 1778 4 color PNjDP gt 1 Image Version 01 00 00 00_01 47 I 6 Bootloader Version 0 90 m Bootloader Rel Date 29 2 2008 _____ Flashsize 32 MB es MAC Address 08 00 06 29 da 00 ie Reboot A HMI device name Version of the HMI device image Version of the boot loader Boot loader release date Size of the internal flash memory in which the HMI device image and project are stored MAC address of the HMI device See section Restarting the HMI device Page 162 Note The size of the internal flash memory does not correspond to the available working memory for a project TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 6 3 6 9 Displaying system properties Introduction The general system specific information provides you with information about the processor operating system and memory Requirements You have opened the System Properties dialog box General t
357. to the alarm buffer 270002 The view shows alarms of a log for which there is Delete older log data if necessary no data in the current project Wildcards are output for the alarms TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 355 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 270003 The service cannot be set up because too many Reduce the number of HMI devices which want to use the devices want to use this service A maximum of four devices may execute this action service 270004 Access to persistent buffer is not possible If the problems persist at the next startup contact Alarms cannot be restored or saved Customer Support delete Flash 270005 Persistent buffer damaged Alarms cannot be If the problems persist at the next startup contact restored Customer Support delete Flash 270006 Project modified Alarms cannot be restored from The project was generated and transferred new to the the persistent buffer HMI device The error should no longer occur when the device starts again 270007 A configuration problem is preventing the restore Update the operating system and then transfer your a DLL is missing a directory is unknown etc project again to the HMI device 280000 Connection is up because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated 280001 No more data is read or writt
358. to the flash memory for example from the Program Files directory These files are written back when the HMI device is started The Temp directory is not saved Automatically restores the file system on the memory card when the HMI device starts up and when a memory card is inserted TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Contiguring the Operating System Procedure Result 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Proceed as follows 1 If you want the system to be restored automatically activate the Automatically repair file system errors check box If the check box is unchecked the system is restored only once prompted to do so 2 Click on the necessary buttons 3 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The HMI device uses the saved registry information the next time it starts The temporary files are copied back 6 3 6 4 Changing monitor settings Requirements Procedure Result You have opened the OP Properties dialog Display tab with the OP ip icon OP Properties ok Persistent Storage Display l Device l Touch i gt Brightness UP DOWN Proceed as follows 1 If you want to increase the brightness press the UP button 2 If you want to decrease the brightness press the DOWN button 3 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The screen settings have been changed TP 177
359. tructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 7 Using Switches Introduction The switches described in the following have two circuit states Each circuit state is assigned a fixed value When you operate the switch it changes to the opposite circuit state and thereby activates the configured value Switches can contain sliders texts or graphics for a specific project Procedure Switch with Slider Proceed as follows Move the slider on the touch screen of the HMI device to the other position or double click the slider area Slider Result The slider is now in the other position The assigned value is activated Procedure for a slider with text or graphic Proceed as follows Touch the switch on the touch screen of the HMI device The switch changes its appearance The associated value is switched Result TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 261 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B 8 2 8 Using a Slider Introduction Appearance Procedure Result 262 With the slider control you can change and monitor process values within a defined range The slider control can also be configured without a slider No value is entered in this case The slider control servers only to display values SIMATIC 100 Slider control for ente
360. ts are not accepted A system alarm is then triggered on the HMI device When the screen keyboard appears the high and low limit values are indicated if configured You have changed the numerical value or entered a new one 232 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A Entering and Editing Alpnanumerical Values Alphanumerical Screen Keyboard Keyboard Levels When you touch an IO field on the HMI touch screen the alphanumerical screen keyboard appears The keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete The layout of the screen keyboard for a vertically mounted HMI device differs slightly from that shown in the figure above The alphanumerical keyboard is organized on several levels e Normal level e Shift level TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 233 Operating a Project 8 1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A Procedure Result 234 You can enter alphanumerical values character by character using the alphanumerical screen keyboard Proceed as follows 1 Touch the relevant IO field on the screen The alphanumerical screen keyboard opens and displays the current value 2 Set the value The following options for entering values are available The current value is deleted when you enter the first charact
361. tting Printer properties 143 160 Printing Labeling strips via a network printer 12 Via network printer 179 Process control phase 193 PROFIBUS bus connector 23 PROFIBUS DP PROFINET interface LEDs Pin assignment PROFINET IO Disabling direct rors Enabling direct keys Setting Project Closing 2 Offline Si Operating 227 Testing online transferring 194 Protective cover 319 Dismantling 323 Installation 321 Protective cover set 23 202 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Index Protective foil Zi Protocol SIMATIC controllers 26 27 Third party controllers 28 Proxy Server Proxy server R Radiation High frequency 29 Radio interference 33 Range of functions additional 25 Alarm buffer 24 Alarms 24 Calculation functions Info texts Lists 24 Recipes 25 Screens 24 Tags 24 Values 24 Rated load Interface Rated voltage Reading Recipe data record Reading out Recipe data record Real time clock Recipe screen 2 Recipe view 2 Synchronizing tags 305 Recipe data record Transferring to PLC Recipe list 297 Recipe menu TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operate 310 Recipe screen 298 Recipe tag Offline 300 Online 300 Synchronizing 299 305 Recipe view 296 Expanded 296 Menu
362. ttings gt Device settings WinCC flexible Runtime generates the system 7 gt In the Windows CE operating system alarm after the first attempt to send an e mail Sa using Control Panel gt Internet Settings gt E mail gt SMTP Server 70037 An e mail cannot be sent for unknown reasons Check the e mail parameters recipient etc The contents of the e mail are lost 70038 The SMTP server has rejected sending or Check the domain of the recipient address or deactivate forwarding an e mail because the domain of the the authentication on the SMTP server if possible recipient is unknown to the server or because the SMTP authentication is currently not used in SMTP server requires authentication WinCC flexible Runtime The contents of the e mail are lost 70039 The syntax of the e mail address is incorrect or Check the e mail address of the recipient contains illegal characters The contents of the e mail are discarded 70040 The syntax of the e mail address is incorrect or contains illegal characters 70041 The import of the user management was aborted Check your user management or transfer it again to due to an error the panel Nothing was imported 80001 The log specified is filled to the size defined Store the file or table by executing a move or copy in percent and must be stored elsewhere function 80002 A line is missing in the specified log 80003 The copying process for logging was
363. uch x to discard the entries Result The data channel is configured TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 127 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B General information Note Changes during the Transfer mode If the HMI device is in Transfer mode while changes are made to the transfer settings the settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted This may occur if the Control Panel is opened to change the transfer properties in an active project NOTICE Transfer mode via channel 2 The bus parameters such as the address of the HMI device are read from the project currently loaded on the HMI device You can change the settings for the transfer via channel 2 To do this you must first end the project and then change the settings on the HMI device Then return to Transfer mode The next time the project is started on the HMI device the settings will be overwritten by the values from the project Transfer settings A project can only be transferred from the configuration PC to the HMI device when at least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device See also Changing Network Settings Page 133 Changing MPI PROFIBUS DP Settings Page 119 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 128 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Confi
364. unction Connection The PLC of which the address ranges are to be displayed Type DB Number Offset Bit The address range of the value Data type Format The data type of the value Status value The value read from the specified address Control value The value to be written to the specified address Change column sequence You change the column sequence if this has been configured To reverse the Format and Control Value columns for example touch the Format header on the touch screen of the HMI device Keep the touch screen pressed and drag the column heading to the Control Value heading TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 263 Operating a Project 8 2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B Operating elements The buttons have the following functions when configured Button Function r Read button Updates the display in the Status value column The button engages when it is pressed You cannot operate any input fields until the button is actuated again and the refresh is stopped a Write button Applies the new value in the Control value column The control value is then written to the PLC Procedure for reading the status value Proceed as follows 1 Enter the address and the desired format of a value for each line Touch the respective columns to display the screen keyboard 2 Once you have entered
365. up to four more failed tags if necessary After that alarm 290003 is output TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 356 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number 290001 Effect cause An attempt has been made to assign a value to a recipe tag which is outside the value range permitted for this type The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up to four more failed tags if necessary After that alarm 290004 is output Remedy Observe the value range for the tag type 290002 It is not possible to convert a value from a source format to a target format The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up to four more failed recipe tags if necessary After that alarm 290005 is output Check the value range or type of the tag 290003 This alarm is output when alarm number 290000 is triggered more than five times In this case no further separate alarms are generated Check in the configuration that the tag addresses have been set up in the controller 290004 This alarm is output when alarm number 290001 is triggered more than five times In this case no further separate alarms are generated Observe the value range for the tag type 290005 This alarm is output when alarm number 290002 is triggered more than five times In this case no further separate alarms are generated Check the value range or type of the tag 290
366. up are acknowledged Further information about acknowledgment may be available in your plant documentation Displaying Alarms Page 285 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Alarms 9 2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B 9 2 4 Editing Alarms Introduction The configuration engineer can assign additional functions to each alarm These functions are executed when the alarm is processed Requirements e The alarm to be edited is indicated in the Alarm window or in the Alarm view e Either the Alarm window or the Alarm view is enabled Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Select the alarm by touching it in the Alarm view or Alarm window 2 Touch the button in the simple Alarm view or G in the advanced Alarm view Result The system executes the additional functions of the alarm Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Note When you edit an unacknowledged alarm it is acknowledged automatically See also Displaying Alarms Page 285 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 289 Operating Alarms 9 2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 290 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Recipes 1 10 1 Overview Introduction Recipes are used when different variants of a product are manuf
367. ure a recipe so that changes to the values of the recipe tags do not have an immediate effect on the current process Synchronization of the recipe values between the HMI device and the PLC depends on whether the configuration engineer has selected the settings Tags online or the setting Tags offline for a recipe The recipe tags are always offline on the TP 177A e Tags online This setting has the following effect When you change recipe values in the recipe screen these changes are applied immediately by the PLC and immediately influence the process If recipe values are changed in the PLC the changed values are displayed immediately in the recipe screen Tags offline With this setting changed recipe values are not synchronized immediately between the HMI device and the PLC In this case the configuration engineer must configure operator controls for transferring the values to the PLC or reading them from the PLC in a recipe screen The recipe values are only synchronized between HMI device and PLC when you operate the appropriate operator control Operating the Enhanced Recipe View Overview The recipe view can be operated as follows Enter values for the recipe elements Create recipe data records Save recipe data records or save them under a new name Delete recipe data records TP 177B and OP 177B Synchronize values of the recipe view with the associated recipe tags Transfer recipe data rec
368. vailable Insert the storage card Data records cannot be saved to read from the storage card TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 345 Appendix A 2 System Alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 130009 The specified folder does not exist on the Insert the storage card storage card Any files saved to this directory are not backed up when you switch off the HMI device 130010 The maximum nesting depth can be exhausted Check the configuration when for example a value change in a script results in the call of another script and the second script in turn has a value change that results in the call of yet a further script etc The configured functionality is not supported 140000 An online connection to the controller is established 140001 The online connection to the controller was shut down 140003 No tag updating or writing is executed Check the connection and if the controller is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PG PC interface Restart the system 140004 No tag update or write operations are executed Verify the connection and check if the controller is because the access point or the module switched on configuration is faulty Check the access point or the module configuration MPI PPI PROFIBUS in the Control Panel with Set PG PC interface
369. value changing 257 Changing 25 Entering 255 Alphanumerical values Changing Entering Ambient temperature Impermissible 41 Angle adapter Appearance Slider control Approvals 36 Automatic Transfer Automation License Manager TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 B Backing up 203 204 206 With ProSave 206 With WinCC flexible Backlighting Reducing Backup 142 188 Registry information Registry Information 156 Temporary files to external storage device 142 Backup to memory card Booting Bottom view 16 48 hg Brightness Changing Bus parameters Profile C Cable cross section Calculation functions 2 Calibrating Touch screen 87 413 143 Care Certificate Delete Certifications 31 Changing Brightness Character repeat Screen keyboard Clean screen 3 Clearance TP 177A Climatic Shipping conditions 371 Index Storage conditions Communications properties 131 Compatibility conflict 203 Configuration phase Configure Network Operating system Screen keyboard Configuring Data channel 93 Interfaces 6C Network Operating system 81 96 PC PPI cable 63 Configuring the network General procedure Connecting Configuration PC Connection sequence Controller Equipotential bonding HMI device 50 Peripherals 66 UPS USB device 65 Connecting a configurati
370. ve occurred in the system in the process or on the HMI device itself A status is reported when it is received An alarm could trigger one of the following alarm events e Incoming e Outgoing e Acknowledge The configuration engineer defines which alarms must be acknowledged by the user An alarm may contain the following information e Date e Time e Alarm text e Error location e State e Alarm class e Alarm number e Acknowledgement group TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 279 Operating Alarms 9 1 Operating Alarms TP 177A Alarm Classes Alarm Buffer Alarms are assigned to various alarm classes e Error Alarms in this class must always be acknowledged Alarms normally indicate critical errors within the plant such as Motor temperature too high e Warning Warning alarms usually indicate states of a plant such as Motor switched on e System System alarms indicate states or events which occur on the HMI device e User specific alarm classes The properties of this alarm class must be defined in the configuration Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Alarm events are saved to an internal volatile buffer The size of this alarm buffer depends on the HMI device type 9 1 2 Displaying Alarms Alarm view and alarm window 280 Alarms are indicated in the Alarm view or in the Alarm window on the HMI device
371. vice can be adapted for custom designs You can find template Labeling protective_cover_TP070_TP170 doc for the labeling strips on the WinCC flexible Installation CD 2 under Documents lt Language gt Slides The templates are formatted for various languages lt Language gt stands for the respective language you are using Requirement The HMI device has been removed TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 320 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Maintenance and care 11 1 Maintenance and Service Procedure for installation Proceed as follows 1 Position the HMI device with the front facing down Set the HMI device down in such a way that the touch screen cannot be damaged during the work to follow 2 Remove the mounting seal on the HMI device Do not damage the mounting seal Mounting seal 3 Position the base frame on the HMI device Position the base frame in such a way that the legend field is visible Base frame Attachment point for the frame Legend field on the base frame TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 321 Maintenance and care 11 1 Maintenance and Service 4 Insert the mounting seal Make sure the mounting seal is not twisted when inserting Mounting seal 5 Turn the HMI device and position it on its back 6 Position the protective cover Check to ensure that the protective
372. vice located somewhere else Note Information on communication using SIMATIC S7 via PROFINET is provided in the WinCC flexible communication user manual The connection to a network offers for example the following options e Printing via a network printer e Saving exporting and importing of recipe data records on or from a server e Transferring a project e Saving data Within a PROFINET network computers are usually addressed using computer names These computer names are translated from a DNS or WINS server to TCP IP addresses This is why a DNS or WINS server is needed for addressing via computer names when the HMI device is in a PROFINET network The corresponding servers are generally available in PROFINET networks Note The use of TCP IP addresses to address PCs is not supported by the HMI device s operating system Consult your network administrator if you have questions in this regard TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4 Printing via a network printer The HMI device s operating system does not support line by line alarm logging via a network printer All other printing functions for example hardcopy or logs are available without restriction via the network Preparation Before beginning the configuration request the following network par
373. view or Alarm window 2 Touch i The alarm or all alarms of the corresponding acknowledgement group are acknowledged Further information about acknowledgment groups may be available in your plant documentation Displaying Alarms Page 280 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Alarms 9 1 Operating Alarms TP 177A 9 1 4 Editing Alarms Introduction The configuration engineer can assign additional functions to each alarm These functions are executed when the alarm is processed Requirements e The alarm to be edited is indicated in the Alarm window or in the Alarm view e Either the Alarm window or the Alarm view is enabled Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Select the alarm by touching it in the Alarm view or Alarm window 2 Touch aj Result The system executes the additional functions of the alarm Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Note When you edit an unacknowledged alarm it is acknowledged automatically See also Displaying Alarms Page 280 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 283 Operating Alarms 9 2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B 9 2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B 9 2 1 Overview Alarms Alarms indicate events and states on the HMI device which have occurred in the system in the process or on the HMI devic
374. wing functions Button Function Displays infotext for an alarm Edit alarm Acknowledging an alarm th TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 286 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Operating Alarms 9 2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B Changing the column sequence and sorting in the advanced Alarm view You can change the column sequence and sorting to suit the project e Change column sequence To reverse the Time and Date columns for example touch the Date header on the HMI device touch screen Continue to press the touch screen and drag the column heading to the Time heading e Changing sorting To change the sorting of the alarms touch the respective column heading on the touch screen of the HMI device Alarm class layout The various alarm classes are identified to distinguish them in the Alarm view Icon Alarm class Error empty Operation depends on the configuration User defined alarm classes S7 SIMATIC or SIMOTION diagnostic alarms System The configuration engineer can edit the alarm class symbols Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic Displaying infotext The configuration engineer can also provide infotext for alarms Proceed as follows to view the infotext for an alarm 1 Select the required alarm in the Alarm view in the advanced 2 Touch the e button
375. witch the HMI device to Transfer mode as follows With a configured operating element during ongoing operation In the Loader of the HMI device The project hmi is opened in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC The data channel is configured on the HMI device The HMI device is in Transfer mode Proceed as follows 1 On the configuring PC select the Transfer settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Select devices for transfer dialog opens Select the HMI device in the left area of the dialog 3 Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC Set the connection parameters Set the transfer parameters in the right area of the dialog Start transfer in WinCC flexible with Transfer The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device The project is transferred to the HMI device If the connection is not available or is defective an error message is displayed on the configuring PC When the transfer is completed successfully the project can be found on the HMI device The transferred project is then started automatically Configuring the data channel Page 172 Setting the Operating Mode Page 195 Data Transmission Options Page 197 Overview Page 198 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 199 Commissioning a project 7 2 Transfer
376. with OK Touch X to discard the entries Result The device name for the HMI device is now set Note Change the device name for the HMI device in the Device name input field to activate the network functions See also Overview of Network Operation Page 129 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 131 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B 6 2 2 22 Activating a Direct Connection Requirement Procedure 132 The Communications Properties dialog has been opened with the t Communications icon Communications Properties Device Name PC Connection These settings control the connection S et between panel and desktop computer V Enable direct connections to the desktop computer 72 Desk_115200 Change 3 Warning Changing the connection may disable communications with your desktop computer These settings control the connection between the HMI device and a desktop computer Enabling a direct connection Button for changing the desktop computer Proceed as follows 1 Open the PC Connection tab The information about the direct connection is displayed 2 Close the dialog with K NOTICE PC Connection Tab If you want to operate a project on the HMI device do not change the information in the PC Connection tab TP 177A
377. y and the HMI device OP 177B TP 177A TP 177B 6 TP 177B 4 Note when connecting The power terminal block is included in the assembly kit and is designed for conductors with a maximum cross section of 1 5 mm2 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 55 nstallation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device Connecting the terminal block NOTICE Damage The pressure of the screwdriver may damage the socket if the terminal strip is plugged into the HMI device when you tighten the screws Only connect the wires when the plug in terminal strip is withdrawn There are two types of plug in terminal strips that can be used for the TP 177A TP 177B and OP 177B a GND ae GND 24 VDC 24 VDC Plug in terminal strip version 1 Plug in terminal strip version 2 Connect the power supply cables to the terminal strip as shown in the figure above Ensure that the lines are connected properly to the correct terminals Refer to the label for the contact pins on the rear of the HMI device Reverse polarity protection The HMI device is equipped with a reverse polarity protection TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 56 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 nstallation and connection 4 3 Connecting the HMI Device Connecting the power supply See
378. ystem Properties OK A General Memory Move slider to the left for more memory to run programs Move it to the right For more storage space Only unused RAM blue portion of the slider bar can be adjusted rei eal Jat EAT R A Aai ae PEN T R an ET C Storage Program memory memory 500KB total 9972KB total 188KB in use 1672KB in use 2 Close the dialog with Ok or x NOTICE Memory Tab Do not change the amount of memory in the Memory tab 6 2 2 19 Configuring the Data Channel Introduction If you block all data channels the HMI device is protected against unintentional overwriting of the project data and HMI device image Requirement B The Transfer Settings dialog has been opened with the Transfer t5 icon Transfer Settings Channel Directories Channel 1 Serial V Enable Channel V Remote Control Channel 2 MPI Profibus x Enable Channel O Advanced Group for the data channel 1 channel 1 Group for the data channel 2 channel 2 Button for the MPI DP Transfer Settings or Network Configuration dialog TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible 126 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 Configuring the Operating System 6 2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6 and OP 177B Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Configure the data channel that you want to use You can clear the
379. ystem function Reconnect the logs CloseAllLogs and the incoming entries exceed the defined buffer size All entries in the buffer are deleted 80017 The number of incoming events cause a buffer Stop the copy action overflow his can be caused for example by several copying actions being activated at the same time All copy jobs are deleted 80019 The connection between WinCC flexible and all logs were closed for example after executing the system function CloseAllLogs Entries are written to the buffer and are then written to the logs when a connection is re established There is no connection to the storage location and the storage medium may be replaced for example 80020 The maximum number of simultaneously copy Wait until the current copying actions have been operations has been exceeded Copying is not completed then restart the last copy action executed 80021 An attempt was made to delete a log which is still Wait until the current copying actions have been busy with a copy action Deletion has not been completed then restart the last action executed 80022 An attempt was made to start a sequence log In the project check which is not a sequence log from a log using the e if the StartSequenceLog system function was system function StartSequenceLog No sequence properly configured log file is created e if the tag parameters are properly provided with data on the HMI device 80023 An attempt was made to copy
380. z 10 V m with 50 pulse modulation at 1 89 GHz RF interference current Test voltage 10 V with 80 amplitude modulation 3 on cables and cable of 1 kHz in the 10 MHz to 80 MHz range shielding conforming to IEC 61000 4 6 TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DG01 0AB1 37 Safety Instructions and General Notes 2 5 Transport and Storage Conditions Emission of Radio Interference 2 5 Emission of electromagnetic interference conforming to 55011 Limit value class A Group 1 measured at a distance of 10 m From 30 to 230 MHz lt 40 dB V m quasi peak From 230 to 1000 MHz lt 47 dB V m quasi peak Additional Measures Before you connect an HMI device to the public electricity supply ensure that it is compliant with Limit Class B conforming to 55022 Transport and Storage Conditions Mechanical and Climatic Transport and Storage Conditions 38 The transport and storage conditions of this HMI device exceed requirements conforming to IEC 61131 2 The following specifications apply to the transport and storage of an HMI device in its original packing The climatic conditions comply to the following standards e IEC 60721 3 3 Class 3K7 for storage e IEC 60721 3 2 Class 2K4 for transport The mechanical requirements are compliant with EC 60721 3 2 Class 2M2 Type of Condition Permissible range Drop test in transport package

SIMATIC HMI HMI Device TP 177A, TP 177B, OP

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents